`
RAM PROMASTER
2020 OWNER’S MANUAL
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects
or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the
engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash
your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may
also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and
equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or
make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling
1-866-726-4636 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada), or by contacting your dealer.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect
manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S. residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting
www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can purchase replacement kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1 INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................... 7
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ................................................................................ 9
3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL .....................................................41
4 SAFETY ........................................................................................................................................56
5 STARTING AND OPERATING .............................................................................................92
6 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY .................................................................................................. 123
7 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ................................................................................... 152
8 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS .......................................................................................... 191
9 MULTIMEDIA ............................................................................................................................ 198
10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .................................................................................................246
11 INDEX..........................................................................................................................................250
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 1
2
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION ......................................................... 7
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ................................... 8
Essential Information ........................................... 8
Symbols................................................................. 8
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ................................... 8
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS .............................. 8
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS ............. 8
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS .......................................................................... 9
Key Fob ................................................................. 9
IGNITION SWITCH ...................................................11
Mechanical Ignition Switch................................ 11
Key-In-Ignition Reminder ................................... 12
SENTRY KEY.............................................................12
Replacement Keys ............................................ 12
General Information ...........................................12
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED .......13
To Arm The System............................................. 13
To Disarm The System ....................................... 13
Rearming Of The System ................................... 14
Security System Manual Override ..................... 14
DOORS .....................................................................14
Power Door Locks ..............................................14
Auto Unlock Doors..............................................15
Automatic Door Locks ........................................15
SEATS .......................................................................15
Manual Adjustments.......................................... 15
Heated Seats — If Equipped .............................. 18
Fold Down Tray — If Equipped ........................... 19
Adjustable Armrests — If Equipped ................... 19
HEAD RESTRAINTS ................................................20
Front Head Restraint Adjustment ..................... 20
Front Head Restraint Removal.......................... 20
STEERING WHEEL ...................................................21
Telescoping Steering Column............................ 21
MIRRORS .................................................................21
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped ............ 21
Outside Mirrors .................................................. 21
Power Mirrors — If Equipped ............................. 22
Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped ................ 22
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped............................ 23
EXTERIOR LIGHTS ...................................................23
Multifunction Lever ........................................... 23
Headlights .......................................................... 23
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) —
If Equipped ......................................................... 24
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch .............. 24
Flash-To-Pass ..................................................... 24
Parking Lights .................................................... 24
Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay .................... 24
Fog Lights — If Equipped ................................... 25
Turn Signals........................................................ 25
Lane Change Assist............................................ 25
Battery Saver ...................................................... 25
INTERIOR LIGHTS ................................................... 25
Courtesy Lights....................................................25
Illuminated Entry.................................................27
WIPERS AND WASHERS........................................ 27
Front Wiper Operation .......................................27
CLIMATE CONTROLS .............................................. 28
Manual Climate Control Overview......................28
Climate Control Functions..................................33
Operating Tips .....................................................33
WINDOWS ............................................................... 35
Power Windows ..................................................35
Window Bar Grates — If Equipped .....................36
Wind Buffeting ....................................................36
HOOD........................................................................ 36
Opening ...............................................................36
Closing .................................................................37
CARGO AREA FEATURES ....................................... 37
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT .......................................... 37
Storage ................................................................37
Cupholders ..........................................................38
Power Outlets ......................................................39
Auxiliary Switches — If Equipped........................40
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 2
3
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT
PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ..........................................41
Instrument Cluster Descriptions........................42
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY .........................43
Location And Controls ........................................43
Change Engine Oil ..............................................44
Display Setup Menu ........................................... 44
Values Displayed ................................................45
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features).............................................................46
TRIP COMPUTER .....................................................46
Trip Button .......................................................... 46
Trip Functions .....................................................46
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES.....................47
Red Warning Lights ............................................47
Yellow Warning Lights ........................................50
Yellow Indicator Lights ....................................... 52
Green Indicator Lights........................................ 53
Blue Indicator Lights ..........................................53
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II ........54
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity ...................................................... 54
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS .............................................................55
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES ..................................................56
Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)....... 56
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ........... 57
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS..............................61
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)......... 61
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS .......................64
Occupant Restraint Systems Features ............ 64
Important Safety Precautions............................ 65
Seat Belt Systems ............................................. 66
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ........... 73
Child Restraints.................................................. 83
Transporting Pets .............................................. 89
SAFETY TIPS ............................................................89
Transporting Passengers................................... 89
Exhaust Gas........................................................ 89
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle ........................................................ 90
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ........................................... 91
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE ..........................................92
Automatic Transmission .................................... 92
Normal Starting .................................................. 92
Cold Weather Operation
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) ................................. 92
If Engine Fails To Start....................................... 92
After Starting ...................................................... 93
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED ............ 93
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS ........... 93
PARKING BRAKE ................................................... 94
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ................................ 95
Key Ignition Park Interlock .................................96
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System ....96
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission ...................96
POWER STEERING ...............................................102
Power Steering Fluid Check ........................... 103
SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED ......................103
To Activate ........................................................ 103
To Set A Desired Speed................................... 104
To Vary The Speed Setting .............................. 104
To Accelerate For Passing ............................... 105
To Resume Speed............................................ 105
To Deactivate ................................................... 105
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED..........................................................105
ParkSense Rear Park Assist Sensors ............. 106
ParkSense Rear Park Assist Alerts ................. 106
ParkSense Rear Park Assist Failure
Indications ........................................................ 108
Cleaning The ParkSense System .................... 108
ParkSense Rear Park Assist System Usage
Precautions ...................................................... 108
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ...............109
REFUELING THE VEHICLE.....................................111
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ....................... 111
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 3
4
VEHICLE LOADING ................................................112
Vehicle Certification Label ...............................112
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)..............112
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) ..................112
Tire Size.............................................................112
Rim Size ............................................................112
Inflation Pressure .............................................112
Curb Weight ......................................................112
Overloading.......................................................112
Loading .............................................................113
TRAILER TOWING..................................................113
Common Towing Definitions............................113
Trailer Hitch Classification ...............................114
Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) .................115
Trailer And Tongue Weight ..............................115
Towing Requirements .....................................116
Towing Tips ......................................................118
RECREATIONAL TOWING
(BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) ............................120
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle..120
Recreational Towing.........................................120
DRIVING TIPS.........................................................121
Driving On Slippery Surfaces ..........................121
Driving Through Water ....................................121
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ..........................123
BULB REPLACEMENT........................................... 123
Replacement Bulbs..........................................123
Replacing Exterior Bulbs.................................. 125
Replacing Interior Bulbs ..................................127
FUSES..................................................................... 128
Underhood Fuses .............................................128
Interior Fuses....................................................131
Right Central Pillar Fuses ................................132
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING .......................... 133
Jack Location....................................................133
Spare Tire Removal..........................................134
Preparations For Jacking .................................135
Jacking Instructions .........................................136
Wheel Covers....................................................139
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED...................... 139
Tire Service Kit Storage ................................... 139
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation..140
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions .................140
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit.................142
JUMP STARTING ................................................... 145
Preparations For Jump Start ...........................145
Jump Starting Procedure .................................146
Battery Location ...............................................147
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ............................ 147
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE .............................. 148
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ............................... 149
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE........................... 149
Automatic Transmission ..................................150
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) ....................................................................151
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) ..........................151
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING .....................................152
Maintenance Plan............................................ 152
Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle ....................... 155
ENGINE COMPARTMENT......................................156
3.6L Engine ..................................................... 156
Checking Oil Level — Gas Engine ................... 157
Adding Washer Fluid........................................ 157
Maintenance-Free Battery .............................. 157
Pressure Washing ............................................ 158
DEALER SERVICE .................................................158
Engine Oil ......................................................... 158
Engine Oil Filter ................................................ 159
Engine Air Cleaner Filter ................................. 159
Air Conditioner Maintenance ......................... 160
Body Lubrication .............................................. 161
Windshield Wiper Blades ................................ 162
Exhaust System ............................................... 162
Cooling System................................................. 163
Brake System .................................................. 166
Automatic Transmission
(3.6L Gasoline Engine Only)............................ 167
RAISING THE VEHICLE..........................................168
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 4
5
TIRES .....................................................................168
Tire Safety Information ....................................168
Tires — General Information ...........................176
Tire Types ..........................................................180
Spare Tires — If Equipped ...............................181
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ...........................183
Tire Chains And Traction Devices ...................184
Tire Rotation Recommendations.....................185
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES .....................185
Treadwear .........................................................186
Traction Grades ................................................186
Temperature Grades ........................................186
STORING THE VEHICLE ........................................186
BODYWORK ...........................................................187
Protection From Atmospheric Agents..............187
Body And Underbody Maintenance.................187
Preserving The Bodywork.................................187
INTERIORS ............................................................188
Seats And Fabric Parts.....................................188
Plastic And Coated Parts..................................189
Leather Parts ....................................................190
Glass Surfaces .................................................190
Cleaning The Instrument Panel Cupholders ...190
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
IDENTIFICATION DATA ......................................... 191
Vehicle Identification Number ........................191
BRAKE SYSTEM .................................................... 191
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS ... 191
Torque Specifications ......................................191
FUEL REQUIREMENTS.......................................... 192
3.6L Engine.......................................................192
Reformulated Gasoline ...................................192
Materials Added To Fuel..................................193
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ............................193
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles....193
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications .........193
MMT In Gasoline .............................................. 194
Fuel System Cautions ......................................194
Carbon Monoxide Warnings ............................194
FLUID CAPACITIES................................................ 195
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS .................................. 195
Engine ...............................................................195
Chassis .............................................................197
MULTIMEDIA
CYBERSECURITY .................................................. 198
UCONNECT SETTINGS ......................................... 199
Uconnect 3/3 NAV Settings............................. 199
SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION ............. 208
Safety Guidelines .............................................208
UCONNECT 3/3 NAV WITH 5-INCH DISPLAY ....209
Introduction To The Uconnect 3/3 NAV
With 5-Inch Display System............................. 209
Radio Mode ...................................................... 211
Media Mode ..................................................... 214
Phone Mode ..................................................... 216
Navigation Mode — If Equipped ...................... 221
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS ...............238
Radio Operation ............................................... 238
Player Operation............................................... 238
IPOD®/USB/MP3 CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED .........................................................238
USB Charging Port............................................ 239
RAM TELEMATICS - IF EQUIPPED .......................239
Ram Telematics General Information............. 239
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES ......240
Regulatory And Safety Information................. 240
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION ......................241
Introducing Uconnect....................................... 241
Get Started ....................................................... 241
Basic Voice Commands................................... 242
Radio................................................................. 242
Media................................................................ 243
Phone................................................................ 243
Voice Text Reply ............................................... 244
General Information......................................... 245
Additional Information ..................................... 245
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 5
6
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE .............................................246
Prepare For The Appointment .........................246
Prepare A List....................................................246
Be Reasonable With Requests........................246
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ................................. 246
FCA US LLC Customer Center..........................247
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center..................247
In Mexico Contact.............................................247
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands...................247
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY).......................................... 247
Service Contract ..............................................247
WARRANTY INFORMATION .................................248
MOPAR PARTS......................................................248
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ...........................248
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.248
In Canada ......................................................... 248
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ...........................249
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 6
7
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on selecting your new vehicle.
Be assured that it represents precision work-
manship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with
the assistance of service and engineering
specialists to acquaint you with the operation
and maintenance of your vehicle. It is supple-
mented by Warranty Information and customer
oriented documents available online. Within
this information, you will find a description of
the services that FCA US LLC offers to its
customers, the vehicle's warranty coverage,
and the details of the terms and conditions for
maintaining its validity. Please take the time to
read all of these publications carefully before
driving your vehicle for the first time. Following
the instructions, recommendations, tips, and
important warnings in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your
vehicle. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle
controls, particularly those used for braking,
steering, transmission, and transfer case
shifting (if equipped). Learn how your vehicle
handles on different road surfaces. Your driving
skills will improve with experience.
This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of
this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated
to specific markets or versions are not expressly
indicated in the text. Therefore, you should only
consider the information which is related to the
trim level, engine, and version that you have
purchased. Any content introduced throughout
the Owner’s Information, that may or may not be
applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with
the wording “If Equipped”. All data contained in
this publication are intended to help you use
your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US
LLC aims at a constant improvement of the
vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves
the right to make changes to the model
described for technical and/or commercial
reasons. For further information, contact an
authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that an
authorized dealer knows your vehicle best, has
factory-trained technicians and genuine
MOPAR® parts, and cares about your satisfac-
tion.
1
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 7
8 INTRODUCTION
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Essential Information
Consult the Table of Contents to determine
which section contains the information you
desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends
on the items of equipment ordered, certain
descriptions and illustrations may differ from
your vehicle's equipment.
The detailed Index at the back of this Owner's
Manual contains a complete listing of all
subjects.
Symbols
Some vehicle components have colored labels
whose symbols indicate precautions to be
observed when using this component. Refer to
“Warning Lights and Messages” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
mation on the symbols used in your vehicle.
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS
against operating procedures that could result
in a collision, bodily injury, and/or death. It also
contains CAUTIONS against procedures that
could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do
not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may
miss important information. Observe all Warn-
ings and Cautions.
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS
The New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not
apply to body modifications or special equip-
ment installed by van conversion/camper
manufacturers/body builders. US residents
refer to the Warranty Information, Section
2.1.C. Canadian residents refer to the “What Is
Not Covered” section of the Warranty Informa-
tion. Such equipment includes video monitors,
VCRs, heaters, stoves, refrigerators, etc. For
warranty coverage and service on these items,
contact the applicable manufacturer.
Operating instructions for the special equip-
ment installed by the conversion/camper
manufacturer should also be supplied with your
vehicle. If these instructions are missing, please
contact an authorized dealer for assistance in
obtaining replacement documents from the
applicable manufacturer.
For information on the Body Builder’s Guide
refer to www.rambodybuilder.com. This website
contains dimensional and technical specifica-
tions for your vehicle. It is intended for Second
Stage Manufacturer's technical support. For
service issues, contact an authorized dealer.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle
could seriously affect its roadworthiness and
safety and may lead to a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 8
9
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
Key Fob
Your vehicle uses a key start ignition system.
The ignition system consists of a key fob with a
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) and an ignition
switch.
The key fob contains an integrated mechanical
key. To use the mechanical key, simply push the
mechanical key release button.
The vehicle is supplied with a code card
containing key code numbers to order duplicate
keys, and the authorized dealer that sold you
your new vehicle has the key code numbers for
your vehicle locks. These numbers can be used
to order duplicate keys.
Key Fob With Integrated Mechanical Key
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
This system allows you to lock or unlock the
doors from distances up to approximately 66 ft
(20 m) using a hand-held key fob. The key fob
does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to
activate the system.
NOTE:
The key fob may not be able to be detected by
the vehicle if it is located next to a mobile
phone, laptop or other electronic device; these
devices may block the key fob’s wireless signal.
Key Fob
To Unlock The Doors
Push and release the unlock button on key fob
once to unlock only the front doors. Push and
release the cargo unlock button on key fob once
to unlock the cargo area (rear lateral sliding
doors and rear door). The turn signal lights will
flash twice to acknowledge the unlock signal.
1 — Mechanical Key Release Button
2 — Driver/Passenger Unlock Button
3 — Lock Button
4 — Cargo Lock/Unlock Button
2
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 9
10 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Lock The Doors
Push and release the lock button on the key fob
to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash
once to acknowledge the signal. If a door is
open, the turn signal lights will flash at an
increased rate.
Locking Doors With A Key
1. Insert the key with either side up.
2. Turn the key to the right to lock the door.
3. Turn the key to the left to unlock the door.
Refer to “Dealer Service” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for maintenance procedures.
Sound Horn With Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when
the doors are locked with the key fob. This
feature can be turned on or turned off. To
change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further informa-
tion.
Key Fob Battery Replacement
NOTE:
Perchlorate Material – special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate.
The recommended replacement battery is
CR2032.
1. Push the mechanical key release button
and release the mechanical key to access
the battery case screw located on the side
of the key fob.
2. Rotate the screw located on the side of the
key fob using a small screwdriver.
Key Fob Screw Location
3. Take out the battery case. Remove and
replace the battery observing its polarity.
4. Refit the battery case inside the key fob and
turn the screw to lock it into place.
Programming Additional Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by
an authorized dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Develop-
ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts
de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage,
et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-
ettre le fonctionnement.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 10
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 11
(Continued)
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-
quier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
IGNITION SWITCH
Mechanical Ignition Switch
1. Place the gear selector in PARK (if equipped
with an automatic transmission).
2. Rotate the key to the STOP (OFF/LOCK)
position.
3. Remove the key from the mechanical igni-
tion switch.
Mechanical Ignition Switch Positions
1 — STOP (OFF/LOCK)
2 — MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)
3 — AVV (START)
WARNING!
Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the
automatic transmission into PARK, apply
the parking brake, turn the vehicle OFF,
remove the key fobs from vehicle, and lock
all doors and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
gear selector.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
WARNING!
(Continued)
2
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 11
12 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver's door when the key is in the
ignition and the ignition switch position is STOP
(OFF/LOCK) sounds a signal to remove the key.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the
engine. The system does not need to be armed
or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless
of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses ignition keys which have an
embedded electronic chip (transponder) to
prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. There-
fore, only keys that are programmed to the
vehicle can be used to start and operate the
vehicle.
NOTE:
A key which has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit
the ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle.
If the vehicle security light is on after the key is
turned to the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position, it
indicates that there is a problem with the elec-
tronics.
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle
have been programmed to the vehicle elec-
tronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE:
Only keys that have been programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start the
vehicle. Once a Sentry Key has been
programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle. When having
the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced,
bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized
dealer.
The VIN is required for authorized dealer
replacement of keys. Duplication of keys may
be performed at an authorized dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always
remove the key from the ignition and lock all
the doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
CAUTION!
Always remove the Sentry Key from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not
compatible with some aftermarket remote
starting systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and loss
of security protection.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 12
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 13
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Develop-
ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts
de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage,
et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-
ettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-
quier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle
doors and ignition for unauthorized operation.
When the vehicle security alarm is activated,
interior switches for door locks are disabled.
The system provides both audible and visible
signals. For the first three minutes, the horn will
sound, and the turn signal lights will flash. For
an additional 15 minutes, only the turn signal
lights will flash.
To Arm The System
To arm the system, the vehicle security alarm
will set when you use the key fob to lock the
doors. If a door or the hood is not properly shut,
the alarm system will not be armed.
To Disarm The System
Use the key fob to unlock the door and disarm
the system.
The vehicle security alarm will also disarm if a
programmed Sentry Key is inserted into the igni-
tion switch. To exit the alarming mode, push the
key fob unlock button, or insert a programmed
Sentry Key into the ignition switch.
The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect
your vehicle. However, you can create condi-
tions where the system will give you a false
alarm. If one of the previously described arming
sequences has occurred, the vehicle security
alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the vehicle security alarm.
2
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 13
14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Rearming Of The System
If the system has not been disabled, the vehicle
security alarm will rearm itself after the 15 addi-
tional minutes of turn lamps flashing. If the
condition which initiated the alarm is still
present, the system will ignore that condition
and monitor the remaining doors and ignition.
Security System Manual Override
The vehicle security alarm will not arm/disarm if
you lock/unlock the doors using the manual
door lock plunger.
DOORS
Power Door Locks
The central lock/unlock button has an LED that
indicates whether the doors are locked or
unlocked.
LED ON: Doors locked. Push the right side of
the central lock/unlock button once again to
centrally unlock all doors. The LED will switch
off.
LED OFF: Doors unlocked. Push the left side
of the central lock/unlock button again to
centrally lock all doors. The doors will be
locked only if all the doors are properly
closed.
Once the doors have been locked with the key
fob, it will no longer be possible to unlock them
by pushing the central lock/unlock button.
To unlock the front doors, pull the inside door
handle to the detent.
The load compartment power door lock switch
is located on the driver door trim panel. Use this
switch to lock or unlock the load compartment
doors.
Load Compartment Power Door Lock Switch
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
For personal security and safety in the
event of a collision, lock the vehicle doors
as you drive as well as when you park and
leave the vehicle.
Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the
automatic transmission into PARK or the
manual transmission into FIRST gear or
REVERSE, apply the parking brake, turn the
vehicle OFF, remove the key fobs from
vehicle, and lock all doors. and lock your
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
WARNING!
(Continued)
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 14
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
(Continued)
Auto Unlock Doors
This feature unlocks all front doors when one
front door is opened.
NOTE:
If the rear or side door is open, only the rear or
side door is unlocked.
Automatic Door Locks
When enabled, the door locks will lock automat-
ically when the vehicle's speed exceeds 12 mph
(20 km/h). The auto door lock feature can be
enabled or disabled through the Uconnect
system.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint
System of the vehicle.
Manual Adjustments
The driver and passenger seats can be adjusted
forward/rearward and reclined. Front and rear
height and lumbar can also be adjusted (if
equipped).
Forward And Rearward Adjustment
The adjusting bar is at the front of the seat, near
the floor. Pull the bar upward to move the seat
forward or rearward. Release the bar once the
seat is in the desired position. Then, using body
pressure, move forward and rearward on the
seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have
latched.
Driver’s Seat
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always
remove the key from the ignition and lock all
of the doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts. In a collision, people riding
in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving
could result in loss of control which could
cause a collision and serious injury or
death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening
the seat belts and while the vehicle is
parked. Serious injury or death could result
from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
1 — Forward/Rearward Adjusting Bar
2 — Lumbar Knob
WARNING!
(Continued)
2
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 15
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Height Adjustment
Without Swivel Seat
The height adjusting levers are located on the
center outboard side of the seat. Lift up on the
front lever to adjust the front of the seat, or lift
up on the rear lever to adjust the rear of the
seat.
To raise the front or rear of the seat, lift the
appropriate lever while none or minimal
weight is applied to the seat.
To lower the front or rear of the seat, lift the
appropriate lever while seated or applying
weight to the seat.
Height Adjustment Levers
With Swivel Seat
The height adjusting knobs are located on the
center outboard side of the seat. Rotate the
front knob to adjust the front of the seat up or
down. Rotate the rear knob to adjust the rear of
the seat up or down.
Height Adjustment Knobs
Recliner Adjustment
Without Swivel Seat
The recliner knob is on the rear outboard side of
the seat. To recline the seatback, lean back,
rotate the knob rearward to position the seat-
back as desired. To return the seatback to its
normal upright position, lean forward, rotate the
knob forward until the seatback is in the upright
position.
Recliner Knob
1 — Front Height Adjusting Lever
2 — Rear Height Adjusting Lever
1 — Front Height Adjusting Knob
2 — Rear Height Adjusting Knob
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 16
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
With Swivel Seat
The recliner lever is located at the lower front
outboard side of the seat. To recline the seat-
back, lean forward slightly, pull the lever
outward, lean back to the desired position and
release the lever. To return the seatback to its
normal upright position, lean forward and pull
the lever outward. Release the lever once the
seatback is in the upright position.
Recliner Lever
Lumbar Support — If Equipped
This feature allows you to increase or decrease
the amount of lumbar support. The lumbar
control knob is located on the rear upper
outboard side of the driver's seatback. Rotate
the control forward to increase and rearward to
decrease the desired amount of lumbar
support.
Suspension Seat — If Equipped
The seat is equipped with a mechanical spring
system and hydraulic shock absorber to ensure
maximum comfort and safety. The system of
springs also effectively absorbs impact from
uneven road surfaces.
Damper Weight Adjustment
Use the weight adjustment knob to set the
required setting based on body weight, with
settings between 88 lbs (40 kg) and 286 lbs
(130 kg).
Weight Adjustment Knob
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving
is dangerous. The sudden movement of the
seat could cause you to lose control. The
seat belt might not be adjusted properly
and you could be injured. Adjust the seat
only while the vehicle is parked.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so
that the shoulder belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision, you could
slide under the seat belt and be seriously or
even fatally injured. Use the recliner only
when the vehicle is parked.
2
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 17
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Swivel Seat — If Equipped
The swivel seat lever is located at the lower
front inboard side of the seat. The seat may be
turned through 180° toward the seat on the
opposite side and approximately 35° toward
the door. The seat may be locked in the driving
position or at the 180° position. To swivel the
seat, pull the swivel seat inboard lever outward,
turn the seat to the desired position and release
the lever.
Swivel Seat Lever
If the vehicle is equipped with interlocking
swivel seats, the seats must be locked in the
facing forward position while driving. If the seats
are not in the correct position, a warning will
appear in the instrument cluster display.
If the driver or the passenger seats are not
locked in the facing forward position before the
first vehicle movement, shifting out of park is
not allowed until the seats are both locked in
the facing forward position. When the seats are
not in the right position and the first vehicle
movement after ignition START is attempted, a
chime and a message will appear in the instru-
ment cluster display. Rotate and lock the swivel
seats in the correct position before trying again.
If the driver or the passenger seats are not
locked in the facing forward position during
movement of the vehicle, a message will appear
in the instrument cluster display and an inter-
mittent chime will sound until key-off or until the
swivel seats are locked in the facing forward
position. Stop and move the swivel seats in the
correct position before proceeding.
If a fault is present in the system and it is not
possible to check the correct position of the
swivel seats, a message and the generic
warning light appears in the instrument cluster
display to inform about the failure. In these
conditions, check the status of the swivel seats
and do not drive the vehicle until the swivel
seats are locked in the facing forward position.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front driver and
passenger seats may be equipped with heaters
in both the seat cushions and seatbacks. The
controls for the front heated seats are located
on the lower outboard side of the seat.
Heated Seat Switch
Push the switch once to turn on the heated
seats. Push the switch a second time to shut the
heating elements off.
NOTE:
Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 18
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
Fold Down Tray — If Equipped
If your vehicle is equipped with a bench seat,
the seat is equipped with a fold-down tray that
can be used as a document support surface. To
use the fold-down tray, grasp the pull tab and
lower the tray.
Fold-Down Pull Tab
The fold-down tray is equipped with two cup
holders and a support surface with a paper
holder clip.
Fold-Down Tray
Adjustable Armrests — If Equipped
The seat adjustable armrest can be raised and
adjusted for height. Underneath the front of the
armrest is the adjuster wheel which will adjust
the height of the armrest up or down.
Adjuster Wheel Location
Turn the adjuster wheel to the right or left to
adjust the height of the armrest up or down.
Adjuster Wheel
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-
tion, alcohol use, exhaustion or other phys-
ical condition must exercise care when
using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seat-
back that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat
heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has
been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface
temperature of the seat.
2
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 19
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk
of injury by restricting head movement in the
event of a rear impact. Head restraints should
be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint
is located above the top of your ear.
Front Head Restraint Adjustment
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint,
push the adjustment button located on the
base of the head restraint and push downward
on the head restraint.
Adjustment Buttons
NOTE:
Do not reposition the head restraint 180
degrees to the incorrect position in an attempt
to gain additional clearance to the back of the
head.
Front Head Restraint Removal
To remove the head restraint, raise it up as far
as it can go. Then, push the adjustment button
and the release button at the base of each post
while pulling the head restraint up. To reinstall
the head restraint, put the head restraint posts
into the holes. Then, adjust it to the appropriate
height.
NOTE:
Do not reposition the head restraint 180
degrees to the incorrect position in an attempt
to gain additional clearance to the back of the
head.
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s
seat until the head restraints are placed in
their proper positions in order to minimize
the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious
injury or death in the event of a collision.
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head
restraints in a location outside the occu-
pant compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-
stalled in the vehicle to properly protect the
occupants. Follow the re-installation
instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 20
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
STEERING WHEEL
Telescoping Steering Column
This feature allows you to lengthen or shorten
the steering column. The telescoping control
handle is located below the steering wheel at
the end of the steering column.
Telescoping Control Handle
To unlock the steering column, pull the control
handle up. To lengthen or shorten the steering
column, pull the steering wheel outward or push
it inward as desired. To lock the steering column
in position, push the control handle down until
fully engaged.
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal
and vertical adjustment of the mirror. Adjust the
mirror to center on the view through the rear
window.
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the
small control under the mirror to the night posi-
tion (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
should be adjusted while set in the day position
(toward the windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside
mirror(s) to center on the adjacent lane of traffic
with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the
inside mirror.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while
driving. Adjusting the steering column while
driving or driving with the steering column
unlocked, could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside
convex mirror will look smaller and farther
away than they really are. Relying too much
on side convex mirrors could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object.
Use your inside mirror when judging the size
or distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex
mirror.
2
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 21
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be
moved either forward or rearward to resist
damage. The hinges have three detent posi-
tions:
Full forward position
Full rearward position
Normal position
Power Mirrors — If Equipped
The power mirror controls are located on the
driver-side door trim panel.
Power Mirror Controls
To adjust a mirror, turn the control knob toward
the left upper, left lower, right upper or right
lower mirror positions indicated by one of the
four arrows on the switch. Tilt the control wand
in the direction you want the mirror to move.
When you are finished adjusting the mirror, turn
the control to the center position “O” to prevent
accidentally moving a mirror.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a power blind
spot mirror, you can adjust them when the
control wand is positioned to the lower arrows.
Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped
The switch for the power folding mirrors is
located on the driver’s door panel below the
power mirror controls.
Power Folding Mirror Switch Location
Push the switch to the right and the mirrors will
fold in, push the switch to the left and the
mirrors will return to the normal driving position.
Power Folding Mirror Switch
The power folding mirrors are designed to be
folded and unfolded using the power folding
switch. If the mirrors are manually folded, the
mirror head may appear loose.
If the mirror head or pivot exhibits a slight
amount of play, the mirror should be power
folded closed, then power folded open (this may
require multiple button pushes).
1 — Power Folding Mirror (Normal Driving Position)
2 — Power Folding Mirror (Fold In Position)
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 22
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
NOTE:
The intended use of the power fold mirrors is by
pushing the buttons to fold and unfold the
mirrors. Only manually fold the mirrors when
necessary.
Forward Folding
Mirrors can be folded forward manually or by
accidental impact. In this case it is possible to
restore to position both ways, manually and
electrically (as described above).
Power/Manual Folding Mirror Positions
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost
or ice. This feature will be activated
whenever you turn on the rear window
defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Climate
Controls” in this chapter for further information.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation
of the headlights, parking lights, turn signals,
headlight beam selection and the passing
lights. The multifunction lever is located on the
left side of the steering column.
Multifunction Lever
Headlights
To turn on the headlights, turn the end of the
multifunction lever to the headlight position.
When the headlight switch is on, the parking
lights, taillights, license plate light, the clear-
ance lights and instrument panel lights are also
turned on. To turn off the headlights, turn the
end of the multifunction lever back to the O (off)
position.
1 — Normal Driving Position
2 — Fold In Position
3 — Fold Forward Position
CAUTION!
Leaving the mirror in a non powered position,
accidental impact or manual fold, may cause
permanent damage to the mirror. Electrically
restore the mirror to its normal position, as
soon as practical.
2
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 23
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) — If
Equipped
NOTE:
When the headlights are turned on, the Daytime
Running Lights will be deactivated.
To activate the Daytime Running Lights (DRLs),
rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the
O (off) position.
NOTE:
The low beams and side/taillights will not be
on with DRLs.
In certain markets, the DRLs may be optional
and can be programmed to be on or off
through the Uconnect system screen. Refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
The Daytime Running Lights will come on when-
ever the ignition is ON, the headlight switch is
off, and the turn signal is off.
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch
With the low beams activated, pull the multi-
function lever toward the steering wheel to
switch the headlights to high beam. A high
beam symbol will be illuminated in the cluster to
indicate the high beams are on. Pull the lever a
second time to switch the headlights back to
low beam.
NOTE:
If the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the STOP
(OFF/LOCK) position, both high and low beam
headlights will also be turned off.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your head-
lights by partially pulling the multifunction lever
toward the steering wheel. This will cause the
high beam headlights to turn on until the lever
is released.
Parking Lights
These lights can only be turned on with ignition
key in the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position or
removed, by moving the end of the multifunc-
tion lever to O (off) position and then to the
headlight position.
The warning light telltale in the instrument
panel comes on. The lights stay on until the next
ignition cycle is performed.
Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can
choose to have the headlights remain on for a
preset period of time.
Activation
Remove the key or turn the ignition to the STOP
(OFF/LOCK) position, and pull the multifunction
lever toward the steering wheel, within two
minutes. Each time the lever is pulled, the acti-
vation of the lights will be extended by 30
seconds. The activation of the lights can be
extended to a maximum of 210 seconds.
The warning light on the instrument panel will
light up and the corresponding message will
appear in the instrument cluster display for as
long as the function is activated. The warning
light comes on when the lever is operated and
stays on until the function is automatically deac-
tivated. Each movement of the lever only
increases the amount of time the lights stay on.
Deactivation
Pull the multifunction lever toward the steering
wheel and hold it for more than two seconds.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 24
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The fog light switch is located on the center
stack of the instrument panel, just below the
climate controls. Push the switch once to turn
the fog lights on. Push the switch a second time
to turn the fog lights off.
NOTE:
If the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the STOP
(OFF/LOCK) position, the fog lights will also turn
off.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and
the arrows on each side of the instrument
cluster flash to show proper operation of the
front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defec-
tive outside light bulb. If an indicator fails to
light when the lever is moved, it would suggest
that the indicator bulb is defective.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving
beyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or
left) will flash five times then automatically turn
off.
Battery Saver
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery,
when the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar
for 15 minutes, the interior lights will automati-
cally turn off.
NOTE:
Battery saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is
placed in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN).
INTERIOR LIGHTS
Courtesy Lights
These lights are mounted between the sun
visors on the overhead shelf. Each light is
turned on by pushing the corresponding switch.
Courtesy Lights
1 — Ambient Light
2 — Right Map Light
3 — On/Right Position
4 — Center Position
5 — Off/Left Position
6 — Left Map Light
2
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 25
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Dome Lights
The interior lights can be set to three different
positions (off/left position, center position, on/
right position). Using the switch on the bottom
of the overhead console:
Push the switch to the on/right position
from its center position and the lights are
always on.
Push the switch to the off/left position
from its center position and the lights are
always off.
Leave the switch in the center position, and
the lights are turned on and off when the
doors are opened or closed.
Map Lights
The switches on the left and right sides of the
overhead console controls the map or reading
function of the lights. Push the switch on the
right position to turn the right light on, push
again to turn the right light off. Push the switch
on the left position to turn the left light on, also
push again to turn the left light off.
Rear Lights
The Rear Cargo Lamp is located at the upper
rear cargo area above the rear doors.
Rear Cargo Lamp
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Side Cargo
Lamp located at the upper rear area of the
passenger side sliding door opening.
Side Cargo Lamp
The Cargo Lamps can be set to three different
positions (off/right position, center position,
on/left position).
Push the Cargo Lamp lens to the right from its
center position and the lamp is always off.
Leave the Cargo Lamp lens in the center posi-
tion, and the lamp is turned on and off when
the sliding doors or rear doors are opened or
closed.
Push the Cargo Lamp lens to the left from its
center position and the lamp is always on.
CAUTION!
Before getting out of the vehicle be sure that
the switch is in the center position or that the
lights are off to avoid draining the battery.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 26
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
Dimmer Controls
The dimmer controls are located on the left side
of the instrument panel below the instrument
cluster display.
Dimmer Controls
Pushing the up or down arrow will increase or
decrease the brightness of the instrument
panel lights, as long as the headlights are
turned on.
Ambient Light
The vehicle is equipped with ambient light on
the dome lamp. The ambient light will be on all
the time, with the option of dimming it with the
dimmer controls as long as the headlights are
turned on.
Illuminated Entry
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
key fob to unlock the doors or open any door.
They also turn on when unlocking or opening
manually from the driver door cylinder.
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30
seconds, or they will immediately fade to off
once the ignition switch is changed to the MAR
(ACC/ON/RUN) position from the STOP (OFF/
LOCK) position.
NOTE:
The front courtesy overhead console and
door courtesy lights will not turn off if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome ON” position.
The illuminated entry system will not operate
if the dimmer control is in the “Dome OFF”
position.
WIPERS AND WASHERS
Front Wiper Operation
The windshield wiper/washer lever is located on
the right side of the steering column. There are
five different modes of operation for the front
windshield wipers. The windshield wiper lever
can be raised or lowered to access the modes.
NOTE:
The windshield wipers/washers will only
operate with the ignition in the MAR (ACC/ON/
RUN) position.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
2
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 27
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Intermittent Wiper System
Push the lever downward to the first detent and
rotate the center ring to use one of the four
intermittent wiper settings when weather condi-
tions make a single wiping cycle, with a variable
delay between cycles, desirable.
Low Speed
Push the lever downward to the second detent.
The wipers will operate at low speed.
High Speed
Push the lever downward to the third detent.
The wipers will operate at high speed.
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer, pull the windshield wiper/
washer lever toward the steering wheel to acti-
vate. The wipers will activate automatically for
three cycles after the lever is released, and then
resume the intermittent interval previously
selected.
If the lever is pulled while in the off position, the
wipers will operate for three cycles and then
turn off.
Mist Feature
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions
make occasional usage of the wipers neces-
sary. Push the lever upward to the MIST position
and release for a single wiping cycle.
NOTE:
The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed
on the windshield. The wash function must be
used in order to spray the windshield with
washer fluid.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control System allows you to regu-
late the temperature, air flow, and direction of
air circulating throughout the vehicle. The
controls are located on the touchscreen (if
equipped) and on the instrument panel below
the radio.
Manual Climate Control Overview
The Manual Temperature Controls consist of a
series of three outer rotary dials (blower speed,
temperature and mode) and three inner push
buttons (Recirculation, A/C, Rear Window
Defroster).
Manual Temperature Controls
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the
windshield could lead to a collision. You might
not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To
avoid sudden icing of the windshield during
freezing weather, warm the windshield with
the defroster before and during windshield
washer use.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 28
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
Manual Climate Control Descriptions
Icon Description
A/C Button
Push the A/C button to engage the Air Conditioning (A/C). The A/C indicator illuminates when A/C is on.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. The Recirculation
indicator and the A/C indicator illuminate when the Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation can be used when
outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all modes except
for Defrost. Recirculation may be unavailable if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield.
The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation
mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
Front Defrost Mode
Turn the mode control knob to the Front Defrost position. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets.
When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings
for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if
equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator illuminates when the rear window defroster is ON. The rear window defroster
automatically turns OFF after 15 minutes.
Temperature Control
Temperature Control regulates the temperature of the air forced through the climate system. The temperature increases as
you turn the temperature control knob clockwise. The temperature decreases as you turn the temperature control knob
counterclockwise.
2
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 29
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds available.
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower
speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.
NOTE:
Depending on the configuration, your vehicle may be equipped with four blower speeds.
Mode Control
Turn the mode control knob to change the airflow distribution mode. The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as
follows:
Panel Mode Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of
air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow
direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vents to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these
outlets.
Icon Description
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 30
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
Bi-Level Mode Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the
floor outlets.
Floor Mode Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy
conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on
the windshield.
Icon Description
2
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 31
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Additional Rear Climate Control — If Equipped
These switches, mounted on the instrument
panel to the left of the steering column, activate
the additional rear heating/air conditioning
system.
NOTE:
These switches must be enabled for operation
by the Upfitter.
Additional Rear Climate Controls Switches
Icon Description
Rear Blower Control
Push this button to turn on the rear climate controls. An indicator light will turn on when the rear
climate control is on.
Rear Temperature Control
Rear Passenger Temperature Up Button To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle,
push temperature control up button to raise the temperature.
Rear Passenger Temperature Down Button To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle,
push temperature control down button to lower the temperature.
MODE Rear MODE Button
Push this button to change the air distribution mode for the rear passengers.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 32
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the
operator to manually activate or deactivate the
air conditioning system. When the air condi-
tioning system is turned on, cool dehumidified
air will flow through the outlets into the cabin.
For improved fuel economy, press the A/C
button to turn off the air conditioning and manu-
ally adjust the blower and airflow mode settings.
Also, make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or
Floor modes.
NOTE:
For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is
in Mix, Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be
turned off, but the A/C system shall remain
active to prevent fogging of the windows.
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or
side glass, select Defrost mode, and increase
blower speed if needed.
If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the
A/C condenser (located in front of the radi-
ator), for an accumulation of dirt or insects.
Clean with a gentle water spray from the front
of the radiator and through the condenser.
Recirculation
In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recircu-
lation feature may be unavailable if conditions
exist that could create fogging on the inside of
the windshield. On systems with Manual
Climate Controls, the Recirculation mode is not
allowed in Defrost mode to improve window
clearing operation. Recirculation is disabled
automatically if this mode is selected.
Attempting to use Recirculation while in this
mode causes the LED in the control button to
blink and then turns off.
Operating Tips
NOTE:
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather
conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected
with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide
proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. A solution of 50%
OAT (Organic Additive Technology) coolant that
meets the requirements of FCA Material Stan-
dard MS.90032 and 50% water is recom-
mended. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in
“Technical Specifications” for proper coolant
selection.
Winter Operation
Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter
months is not recommended because it may
cause window fogging.
Vacation Storage
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more,
run the air conditioning system at idle for about
five minutes in the fresh air and high blower
setting. This will ensure adequate system lubri-
cation to minimize the possibility of compressor
damage when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly
removed by turning the mode selector to
Defrost. The Defrost/Floor mode can be used to
maintain a clear windshield and provide suffi-
cient heating. If side window fogging becomes a
problem increase blower speed. Vehicle
windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but
rainy or humid weather.
2
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 33
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Recirculate without A/C should not be used for
long periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in
front of the windshield, is free of obstructions
such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air
intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the
plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear
of ice, slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter
The climate control system filters outside air
containing dust, pollen and some odors. Strong
odors cannot be totally filtered out. Refer to
“Dealer Service” in “Servicing and Mainte-
nance” for filter replacement instructions.
Operating Tips Chart
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the
rear window. Do not use abrasive window
cleaners on the interior surface of the
window. Use a soft cloth and a mild
washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
WEATHER
CONTROL
SETTINGS
Hot Weather And
Vehicle Interior Is Very
Hot
Set the mode control
to , on, and
blower on high. Roll
down the windows for
a minute to flush out
the hot air. Adjust the
controls as needed to
achieve comfort.
Warm Weather
Turn on and set
the mode control to
the position.
Cool Sunny
Operate in
position.
Cool & Humid
Conditions
Set the mode control
to and turn on
to keep windows
clear.
Cold Weather Set the mode control
to the position. If
windshield fogging
starts to occur, move
the control to the
position.
WEATHER
CONTROL
SETTINGS
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 34
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The control on the left front door panel has
up-down switches that give you fingertip control
of all power windows. There is a single opening
and closing switch on the front passenger door
for passenger window control.
Power Window Switches
NOTE:
The Key Off Power Delay feature will allow the
power windows to operate for up to three
minutes after the ignition is placed in the STOP
(OFF/LOCK) position. This feature is cancelled
when either front door is opened.
Auto-Down Feature — If Equipped
The window switches may be equipped with an
Auto-Down feature. Push the window switch for
half a second, release, and the window will go
down automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way down
during the auto-down operation, pull up or push
down on the switch briefly.
To open the window part way, lift the window
switch to the detent for less than half a second
and release it to stop the window.
NOTE:
The power window switches remain active for
up to three minutes after the ignition switch has
been placed in the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position.
Opening either of the vehicle’s front doors will
cancel this feature.
Auto-Up Feature — If Equipped
The driver window may be equipped with an
Auto-Up feature. This feature is only available
when the ignition is in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)
position. Lift the window switch to the detent for
half a second, release, and the window will go
up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up
during the auto-up operation, pull up/push
down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window
switch to the detent for less than half a second
and release it when you want the window to
stop.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle or in a location accessible to chil-
dren. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
WARNING!
There is no auto-reverse protection. Be sure
to clear all objects from the window before
closing.
2
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 35
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Window Bar Grates — If Equipped
This vehicle may be equipped with metal grates
over the side door windows. This feature is a
part of the vehicle’s safety system, and is
designed to protect you and your passengers in
the event of an accident.
Window Bar Grates
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the percep-
tion of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type
sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind
buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof
(if equipped) in certain open or partially open
positions. This is a normal occurrence and can
be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the
rear windows open, open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If
the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open,
adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the
buffeting or open any window.
HOOD
Opening
To open the hood, two latches must be
released.
1. Open the driver’s door to gain access to the
hood release lever. Pull the hood release
lever located on the side of the instrument
panel.
Hood Release
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle, reach
into the opening beneath the center of the
hood and push the safety latch lever to the
right to release it, before raising the hood.
Hood Safety Latch Lever Location
WARNING!
The metal grates over the sliding door
windows are designed to protect you in the
event of an accident. Modification or removal
of the grates could lead to serious injury or
death.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 36
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
3. Raise the hood and place the hood prop rod
in hood slot to secure the hood in the open
position.
Hood Prop Rod Slot
Closing
CARGO AREA FEATURES
The cargo area may be equipped with different
options such as optional side panels, rear seats
and an optional floor.
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT
Storage
Glove Compartments
The glove compartment is located on the
passenger side of the instrument panel and
features both an upper and lower storage area.
Glove Compartments
Front Door Storage — If Equipped
Storage areas and bottle holders are located in
both the front door trim panels.
Front Door Storage
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before
driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully
latched, it could open when the vehicle is in
motion and block your vision. Failure to follow
this warning could result in serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage:
Before closing hood, make sure the hood
prop rod is fully seated into its storage
retaining clips.
Do not slam the hood to close it. Use a firm
downward push at the center front edge of
the hood to ensure that both latches
engage. Never drive your vehicle unless the
hood is fully closed, with both latches
engaged.
1 — Upper Glove Compartment
2 — Lower Glove Compartment
2
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 37
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Dash Storage
The dash storage is located on the right side of
the instrument panel.
Dash Storage
Dashboard Clipboard
Located on top of the dashboard is a clipboard
and two storage bins on each side of the clip-
board.
Clipboard And Storage Bins
Underseat Storage Tray (Driver Side Only) — If
Equipped
A storage tray is located under the driver’s seat.
To remove the tray, lift up on the tray to with-
draw it from the hooks on the support base,
then slide the tray out from under the seat.
Underseat Storage Tray
Cupholders
The cupholders for the driver’s and passenger’s
area are located near the floor just under the
center stack storage compartment. There are
cupholders located in each door panel as well
as one single cupholder located to the right of
the manual climate controls.
Cupholders
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 38
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
Power Outlets
Passenger Compartment Power Outlet
The power outlet is located on the instrument
panel passenger compartment near the cup
holder. It only operates with the ignition key at
MAR (ACC/ON/RUN).
Passenger Compartment Power Outlet
Load Compartment Power Outlet — If Equipped
The load compartment power outlet is located
in rear cargo compartment. The outlet can be is
used for powering 12 Volt adaptive accessories
and recharging communications devices.
Load Compartment Power Outlet
NOTE:
Do not connect devices with power higher than
180 W to the socket. Do not damage the socket
by using unsuitable adaptors.
Power Outlet Fuses — Under Hood
1 — F14 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Front Power Outlet
2 — F09 Fuse 15 Amp Blue Rear Power Outlet
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt
outlet.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use and while
driving the vehicle.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
2
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 39
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Auxiliary Switches — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with two auxiliary
switches located on the instrument panel to the
left of the steering column which can be used to
power various electronic devices. Connections
to the switches are found in the right central
pillar fuse panel at the base of the passenger
side B-pillar.
Auxiliary Upfitter Switches
Auxiliary Switch 1 is configured to constant
battery feed, while Auxiliary Switch 2 is config-
ured to ignition feed.
For further information on using the auxiliary
switches, please refer to the Ram Body Builders
Guide by accessing www.rambodybuilder.com
and choosing the appropriate links.
CAUTION!
Many accessories that can be plugged in
draw power from the vehicle's battery, even
when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the
vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently
to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e.,
coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will
degrade the battery even more quickly.
Only use these intermittently and with
greater caution.
After the use of high power draw accesso-
ries, or long periods of the vehicle not being
started (with accessories still plugged in),
the vehicle must be driven a sufficient
length of time to allow the generator to
recharge the vehicle's battery.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 40
41
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Instrument Cluster
3
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 41
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Cluster Descriptions
1. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
2. Instrument Cluster Display
When the appropriate conditions exist,
this display shows instrument cluster
display messages. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in this chapter for further
information.
Odometer/Trip Odometer Display Area
US Federal regulations require that upon
transfer of vehicle ownership, the seller
certify to the purchaser the correct mileage
that the vehicle has been driven. If your
odometer needs to be repaired or serviced,
the repair technician should leave the odom-
eter reading the same as it was before the
repair or service. If the technician cannot do
so, then the odometer must be set at zero,
and a sticker must be placed in the door
jamb stating what the mileage was before the
repair or service. It is a good idea for you to
make a record of the odometer reading
before the repair/service, so that you can be
sure that it is properly reset, or that the door
jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must
be reset at zero.
Gear Selector Status (PRND)
The gear selector status “P,R,N,D,1,2,3,4,5,
6” are displayed indicating the gear selector
position. Telltales “1,2,3,4,5,6” indicate the
manual mode has been engaged and the
gear selected is displayed. Refer to “Auto-
matic Transmission” in “Starting And Oper-
ating” for further information on Electronic
Range Select (ERS).
3. Tachometer
This gauge measures engine revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000). Before the
pointer reaches the red area, ease up on
the accelerator to prevent engine
damage.
4. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine
coolant temperature. Any reading within
the normal range indicates that the
engine cooling system is operating satis-
factorily.
The pointer will likely indicate a higher
temperature when driving in hot weather
or up mountain grades. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the
normal operating range.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous.
You or others could be badly burned by steam
or boiling coolant. You may want to call an
authorized dealer for service if your vehicle
overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, refer to “Cooling System” in
“Servicing And Maintenance” and follow the
warnings under the Cooling System Pressure
Cap paragraph.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system
could damage your vehicle. If the
temperature gauge reads “H,” pull over and
stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H,” turn the engine off
immediately and call an authorized dealer for
service.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 42
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 43
5. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
fuel tank when the ignition switch is in
the ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel door is
located.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle will be equipped with an instru-
ment cluster display, which offers useful infor-
mation to the driver. With the ignition in the
STOP (OFF/LOCK) mode, opening/closing of a
door will activate the display for viewing, and
display the total miles, or kilometers, in the
odometer. Your instrument cluster display is
designed to display important information
about your vehicle’s systems and features.
Using a driver interactive display located on the
instrument panel, your instrument cluster
display can show you how systems are working
and give you warnings when they are not. The
steering wheel mounted controls allow you to
scroll through the main menus and submenus.
You can access the specific information you
want and make selections and adjustments.
Location And Controls
The instrument cluster display features a driver
interactive display that is located in the instru-
ment cluster.
Instrument Cluster Display
This system allows the driver to select a variety
of useful information by pushing the switches
mounted on the instrument panel. Examples of
menu items are:
Speed Beep
Buzzer Volume
Seat Belt Buzzer (Just Available After SBR
Disable Made By CHR Service)
Exit Menu
If equipped with a Uconnect system, some
customer programmable features will display in
the radio. Refer to the “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
The system allows the driver to select informa-
tion by pushing the following buttons mounted
on the instrument panel to the left of the
steering column:
Display Control Buttons
NOTE:
The MODE button must be pushed prior to
pressing the up arrow and down arrow buttons.
3
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 43
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MODE Button
Push and hold the MODE button for a time
longer than one second to access/select the
information screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item. Push and hold the MODE
button for two seconds to reset displayed/
selected features that can be reset.
Up Arrow Button
Push and release the up arrow
button to scroll upward through the
main menu and submenus or
adjust the illumination on the
instrument panel when the headlights are on.
Down Arrow Button
Push and release the down arrow
button to scroll downward through
the main menu and submenus or
adjust the illumination on the
instrument panel when the headlights are on.
Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil
change indicator system. The “Change Engine
Oil” message will display in the instrument
cluster display. The engine oil change indicator
system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate, depen-
dent upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to
display each time you turn the ignition switch to
the ON/RUN position. To turn off the message
temporarily, push and release the MODE
button. To reset the oil change indicator system
(after performing the scheduled maintenance),
refer to the following procedure.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position
(do not start the engine).
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal slowly,
three times, within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK
position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator
system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this
procedure.
Display Setup Menu
The menu comprises a series of functions
arranged in a cycle. Push and release the up or
down arrow button to access the different
options and settings (setup).
The setup menu can be activated by pushing
the MODE button. Single pushes on the up or
down arrow button will scroll through the setup
menu options. The menu items include the
following functions:
Speed Beep
Buzzer Volume
Seat Belt Buzzer (Just Available After SBR
Disable Made By CHR Service)
Exit menu
NOTE:
If equipped, some customer programmable
features will display in the Uconnect system.
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supple-
ment for further information.
Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu Without
Submenu
1. Briefly push and release the MODE button
to select the main menu option to set.
2. Push and release the up or down arrow
button (by single pushes) to select the new
setting.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 44
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 45
3. Briefly push and release the MODE button
to store the new setting and go back to the
main menu option previously selected.
Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu With
Submenu
1. Briefly push and release the MODE button
to display the first submenu option.
2. Push and release the up or down arrow
button (by single pushes) to scroll through
all the submenu options.
3. Briefly push and release the MODE button
to select the displayed submenu option and
to open the relevant setup menu.
4. Push and release the up or down arrow
button (by single pushes) to select the new
setting for this submenu option.
5. Briefly push and release the MODE button
to store the new setting and go back to the
previously selected submenu option.
6. Push and release and hold the MODE
button to return to the main menu (short
hold) or the main screen (longer hold).
Values Displayed
NOTE:
All of the following items are accessed by
pressing the TRIP button.
Range
This indicates the distance which may be trav-
eled with the fuel remaining in the tank,
assuming that driving conditions will not
change. The message “----” will appear on the
display in the following cases:
Distance less than 30 miles (or 50 km).
The vehicle is parked for a long time with the
engine running.
NOTE:
The range depends on several factors: driving
style, type of route (freeway, residential, moun-
tain roads, etc.), conditions of use of the vehicle
(load, tire pressure, etc.). Trip planning must
take into account the above notes.
Travel Distance
This value shows the distance covered since the
last reset.
Average Fuel Consumption
This value shows the approximate average
consumption since the last reset.
Current Fuel Consumption
This indicates the fuel consumption. The value
is constantly updated. The message “----” will
appear on the display if the vehicle is parked
with the engine running.
Average Speed
This value shows the vehicle's average speed as
a function of the overall time elapsed since the
last reset.
Travel Time
This value shows the time elapsed since the last
reset.
3
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 45
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)
Speed Beep
Buzzer Volume
Seat Belt Buzzer (Just Available After SBR
Disable Made By CHR Service)
Exit Menu
NOTE:
If equipped, some customer programmable
features will display in the Uconnect system.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
TRIP COMPUTER
The Trip Computer is located in the instrument
cluster. It features a driver-interactive display
(displays information such as trip information,
range, fuel consumption, average speed, and
travel time).
NOTE:
The Uconnect System also has a Trip Computer
display and menus to customize the informa-
tion displayed in the cluster. For further infor-
mation, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia”.
Trip Button
The TRIP button, located on the right steering
column stalk, can be used to display and to
reset the previously described values.
A short button push displays the different
values.
A long button push resets the system and
then starts a new trip.
New Trip
To reset:
Push and hold the TRIP button to reset the
system manually.
When the “Trip distance” reaches
99999.9 miles or kilometers or when the
“Travel time” reaches 999.59 (999 hours
and 59 minutes), the system is reset auto-
matically.
Disconnecting/Reconnecting the battery
resets the system.
NOTE:
If the reset operation occurs in the presence of
the screens concerning Trip A or Trip B, only the
information associated with Trip A or Trip B
functions will be reset.
Start Of Trip Procedure
With the ignition on, push and hold the TRIP
button for over two seconds to reset trip infor-
mation.
Exit Trip
To exit the Trip function, push the TRIP button
until all the trip menu items have been
displayed and the display returns to the main
menu.
Trip Functions
Both trip functions are resettable (reset — start
of new trip).
“Trip A” can be used to display the figures
relating to:
Trip Distance A
Average Fuel Consumption
Average Speed A
Travel Time A (Driving Time)
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 46
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 47
“Trip B” can be used to display the figures
relating to:
Trip Distance B
Average Fuel Consumption
Average Speed B
Travel Time B (Driving Time)
NOTE:
“Trip B” functions may be excluded (see “Trip B
Data”). “Range” and “Instantaneous Fuel
Consumption” cannot be reset.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in
the instrument panel together with a dedicated
message and/or acoustic signal when appli-
cable. These indications are indicative and
precautionary and as such must not be consid-
ered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the
information contained in the Owner’s Manual,
which you are advised to read carefully in all
cases. Always refer to the information in this
chapter in the event of a failure indication. All
active telltales will display first if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different
based upon equipment options and current
vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and
may not appear.
Red Warning Lights
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
When the ignition is first placed in the
ON/RUN or MAR/ON/RUN position, if
the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a
chime will sound and the light will turn
on. When driving, if the driver or front passenger
seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will flash or remain on continu-
ously and a chime will sound. Refer to “Occu-
pant Restraints Systems” in “Safety” for further
information.
Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
MAR/ON/RUN position. If the light is
either not on during startup, stays on, or turns
on while driving, have the system inspected at
an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This
light will illuminate with a single chime when a
fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been
detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared.
If the light comes on intermittently or remains
on while driving, have an authorized dealer
service the vehicle immediately.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
the battery is not charging properly. If
it stays on while the engine is running,
there may be a malfunction with the
charging system. Contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the elec-
trical system or a related component.
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when one
or more door(s) are not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving and a door is opened,
there will also be a single chime.
3
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 47
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
inform of a problem with the Elec-
tronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If
a problem is detected while the
vehicle is running, the light will either stay on or
flash depending on the nature of the problem.
Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the transmission is
placed in the PARK (P) position. The light should
turn off. If the light remains on with the vehicle
running, your vehicle will usually be drivable;
however, see an authorized dealer for service
as soon as possible.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is
running, immediate service is required and you
may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
MAR/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as
a bulb check. If the light does not come on
during starting, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
Transmission Fault Warning Light
This light will illuminate (together with
a message in the instrument cluster
display and a buzzer) to indicate a
transmission fault. Contact an autho-
rized dealer if the message remains after
restarting the engine.
Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated
engine condition. If the engine
coolant temperature is too high, this
indicator will illuminate and a single
chime will sound.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over
and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on,
turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the tempera-
ture reading does not return to normal, turn the
engine off immediately and call for service.
Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “In Case
Of Emergency” for further information.
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various
brake functions, including brake
fluid level and parking brake appli-
cation. If the brake light turns on it
may indicate that the parking brake is
applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or
that there is a problem with the anti-lock
brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake
has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at
the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it
indicates a possible brake hydraulic system
malfunction or that a problem with the Brake
Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will
remain on until the condition has been
corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying
the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be
felt during each stop.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 48
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 49
The dual brake system provides a reserve
braking capacity in the event of a failure to a
portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either
half of the dual brake system is indicated by the
Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when
the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is
corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level
conditions. The vehicle should have service
performed, and the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic
Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of
an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn
on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to
the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be
checked by turning the ignition switch from the
OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light
should illuminate for approximately two
seconds. The light should then turn off unless
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking
brake is applied with the ignition switch in the
ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate low engine oil pressure. If the
light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as
possible, and contact an authorized dealer. A
chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level
must be checked under the hood.
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for
approximately 15 seconds when the
vehicle security alarm is arming, and
then will flash slowly until the vehicle
is disarmed.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may
have failed. It will take longer to stop the
vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the
vehicle checked immediately.
3
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 49
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Yellow Warning Lights
Immobilizer Fail / VPS Electrical Alarm Indicator
Light
This telltale will illuminate when the
vehicle security alarm system has
detected an attempt to break into the
vehicle.
NOTE:
After cycling the ignition to the ON/RUN posi-
tion, the Vehicle Security Warning Light could
illuminate if a problem with the system is
detected. This condition will result in the engine
being shut off after two seconds.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning
Light
The warning light switches on and a
message is displayed to indicate that
the tire pressure is lower than the
recommended value and/or that slow
pressure loss is occurring. In these cases,
optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may
not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition
mentioned above, the display will show the indi-
cations corresponding to each tire.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres-
sure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pres-
sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pres-
sure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low
tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-
mately one minute and then remain continu-
ously illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as
the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the installation of
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat
tires as handling may be compromised. Stop
the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and
steering. If a tire puncture occurs, repair
immediately using the dedicated tire repair
kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 50
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 51
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Warning Light
The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instru-
ment cluster will come on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position, and
when ESC is activated. It should turn off with the
engine running. If the “ESC Indicator Light”
comes on continuously with the engine running,
a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this light remains on after several
ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater
than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized
dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” and the “ESC
Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or
MAR (ACC/ON/RUN), the ESC system will be
on, even if it was turned off previously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
This light will come on when the vehicle is in
an ESC event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning
Light
This light indicates the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or
MAR/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even
if it was turned off previously.
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light
(MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indi-
cator Light (MIL) is a part of an
Onboard Diagnostic System called
OBD II that monitors engine and auto-
matic transmission control systems. This
warning light will illuminate when the ignition is
in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If
the bulb does not come on when turning the
ignition switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the
condition checked promptly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
and warning have been established for the
tire size equipped on your vehicle.
Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement
equipment that is not of the same size, type,
and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire
sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become
inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
3
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 51
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing
gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate
the light after engine start. The vehicle should
be serviced if the light stays on through several
typical driving styles. In most situations, the
vehicle will drive normally and will not require
towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash
to alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
converter damage. The vehicle should be
serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible if this occurs.
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Warning Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS). The light will turn
on when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN or MAR/ON/RUN position
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and service is
required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if the
brake warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should
be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light
does not turn on when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN or MAR/ON/RUN position, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
Generic Warning Light
The Generic Warning Light will illumi-
nate if any of the following conditions
occur: Engine Oil Pressure Sensor
Failure, External Light Failure, Fuel
Cut-Off intervention or fail, Parking Sensor
Failure, DST System Failure.
The telltale will remain on fixed in case of swivel
seat failure and on blinking in case of Air Bag
Warning Light Failure. Contact an authorized
dealer immediately for service.
Yellow Indicator Lights
Stop Light Failure Indicator Light
This light will illuminate if one or more
of the stop light bulb fails.
The failure relating to this light could be:
One or more blown bulbs.
A blown protection fuse.
A break in the electrical connection.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as
referenced above, can reach higher
temperatures than in normal operating
conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances
such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This
could result in death or serious injury to the
driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause damage
to the vehicle control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and driveability. If the
MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter
damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 52
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 53
External Light Failure Indicator Light — If Equipped
The External Light Failure Indicator
will come on when a failure to one of
the following lights is detected:
Direction Indicators
Backup Lights
Parking Lights
Daytime Running Lights
Clearance Lights
License Plate Lights
The failure relating to these lights could be:
One or more blown bulbs
A blown protection fuse
A break in the electrical connection
TOW/HAUL Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate
when TOW/HAUL mode is selected.
Refer to “Trailer Towing” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
Green Indicator Lights
Turn Signal Indicator Light
The turn signal arrows will flash inde-
pendently when left or right turn
signals are selected. Turn signals can
be activated when the multifunction
lever is moved down (left) or up (right).
NOTE:
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if
either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the front fog lights are on.
For further information, refer to “Exte-
rior Lights” in “Getting To Know Your
Vehicle”.
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate
when the park lights or headlights are
turned on.
For further information, refer to “Exterior Lights”
in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle”.
Cruise Control Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the cruise control is activated.
NOTE:
There will be no change in the indicator light
when the desired speed is set.
Refer to “Speed Control” in “Starting And Oper-
ating” for further information.
Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to
indicate that the high beam head-
lights are on. With the low beams acti-
vated, push the multifunction lever
forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to turn
on the high beams. Pull the multifunction lever
rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn
off the high beams. If the high beams are off,
pull the lever toward you for a temporary high
beam on, “flash to pass” scenario.
3
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 53
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated
Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This
system monitors the performance of the emis-
sions, engine, and transmission control
systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as
engine emissions well within current govern-
ment regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD
II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes
and other information to assist your service
technician in making repairs. Although your
vehicle will usually be drivable and not need
towing, see an authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard
Diagnostic system (OBD II) and a connection
port to allow access to information related to
the performance of your emissions controls.
Authorized service technicians may need to
access this information to assist with the diag-
nosis and service of your vehicle and emissions
system.
For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity”
in “Multimedia”.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could
cause further damage to the emission
control system. It could also affect fuel
economy and driveability. The vehicle must
be serviced before any emissions tests can
be performed.
If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is
running, severe catalytic converter damage
and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
WARNING!
ONLY an authorized service technician
should connect equipment to the OBD II
connection port in order to read the VIN,
diagnose, or service your vehicle.
If unauthorized equipment is connected to
the OBD II connection port, such as a
driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
Be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could
be impaired or a loss of vehicle control
could occur that may result in an acci-
dent involving serious injury or death.
Access, or allow others to access, infor-
mation stored in your vehicle systems,
including personal information.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 54
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 55
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement
to pass an inspection of your vehicle's emis-
sions control system. Failure to pass could
prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection
and Maintenance (I/M), this check
verifies the “Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
on when the engine is running, and that the
OBD II system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The
OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle
was recently serviced, recently had a depleted
battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II
system should be determined not ready for the
I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test
station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system
is ready, you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position,
but do not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to
the ON position, you will see the “Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light (MIL)” symbol come on
as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two
things will happen:
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds
and then return to being fully illuminated
until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle's
OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
The MIL will not flash at all and will remain
fully illuminated until you place the ignition
in the off position or start the engine. This
means that your vehicle's OBD II system is
ready and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should
see an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your
vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery
failure or replacement, you may need to do
nothing more than drive your vehicle as you
normally would in order for your OBD II system
to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II
system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated
during normal vehicle operation you should
have your vehicle serviced before going to the I/
M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle
because the MIL is on with the engine running.
3
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 55
56
(Continued)
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is
designed to aid the driver in maintaining vehicle
control under adverse braking conditions. The
system operates with a separate computer to
modulate hydraulic pressure, to prevent wheel
lock-up and to help avoid skidding on slippery
surfaces.
The system's pump motor runs during an ABS
stop to provide regulated hydraulic pressure.
The pump motor makes a low humming noise
during operation, which is normal.
The ABS includes an amber ABS Warning
Light. When the light is illuminated, the ABS is
not functioning. The system reverts to stan-
dard non-anti-lock brakes. Placing the ignition
in the OFF mode and to the ON mode again
may reset the ABS if the fault detected was
only momentary.
When you are in a severe braking condition
involving the use of the ABS, you will experience
some pedal drop as the vehicle comes to a stop.
This is the result of the system reverting to the
base brake system.
Engagement of the ABS may be accompanied
by a pulsing sensation. You may also hear a
clicking noise. These occurrences are normal
and indicate that the system is functioning
properly.
WARNING!
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic
equipment that may be susceptible to inter-
ference caused by improperly installed or
high output radio transmitting equipment.
This interference can cause possible loss of
anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by
qualified professionals.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will
diminish their effectiveness and may lead
to a collision. Pumping makes the stopping
distance longer. Just press firmly on your
brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking or steering efficiency
beyond that afforded by the condition of the
vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
afforded.
The ABS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle
too closely, or hydroplaning.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner that could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
WARNING!
(Continued)
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 56
SAFETY 57
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Elec-
tronic Brake Control (EBC) system that includes
the Traction Control System (TCS), Brake Assist
System (BAS) and Electronic Stability Control
(ESC), Trailer Sway Control (TSC), and Hill Start
Assist (HSA). These systems complement the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) by optimizing the
vehicle braking capability during emergency
braking maneuvers.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The Brake Assist System (BAS) is designed to
optimize the vehicle’s braking capability
during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situa-
tion by sensing the rate and amount of brake
application and then applies optimum pres-
sure to the brakes. This can help reduce
braking distances. The BAS complements
the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying
the brakes very quickly results in the best
BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of the
system, you must apply continuous braking
pressure during the stopping sequence (do
not “pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake
pedal pressure unless braking is no longer
desired. Once the brake pedal is released,
the BAS is deactivated.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) enhances
directional control and stability of the vehicle
under various driving conditions. ESC corrects
for over/under steering of the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to
assist in counteracting the over/under steer
condition. Engine power may also be reduced to
help the vehicle maintain the desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine
the vehicle path intended by the driver and
compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.
When the actual path does not match the
intended path, ESC applies the brake of the
appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the
oversteer or understeer condition.
Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more
than appropriate for the steering wheel posi-
tion.
Understeer - when the vehicle is turning
less than appropriate for the steering
wheel position.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of
a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner,
which could jeopardize the user's safety or
the safety of others.
4
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 57
58 SAFETY
(Continued)
ESC Operating Modes
The “ESC OFF” switch is located in the
center switch bank, next to the hazard
flasher switch.
ESC On
This mode is the normal operating mode for ESC
equipped vehicles. Whenever the vehicle is
started, the ESC system will be in this mode.
This mode should be used for most driving situ-
ations. ESC should only be turned off for
specific reasons as noted below.
ESC Partial Off
This mode is entered by momentarily pushing
the “ESC OFF” switch.
When in the “Partial Off” mode, the TCS portion
of ESC, except for the “limited slip” feature
described in the TCS section, has been disabled
and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” will be illumi-
nated. When in the “Partial Off” mode, ESC will
operate without engine torque management.
This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is
in deep snow, sand or gravel conditions and
more wheel spin than ESC would normally allow
is required to gain traction. To turn ESC on again,
momentarily push the “ESC OFF” switch. This will
restore the normal “ESC On” mode of operation.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. ESC cannot prevent acci-
dents, including those resulting from
excessive speed in turns, driving on very
slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC
also cannot prevent accidents resulting
from loss of vehicle control due to inap-
propriate driver input for the conditions.
Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents. The capabilities of
an ESC equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s
safety or the safety of others.
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly
maintain your vehicle, may change the
handling characteristics of your vehicle,
and may negatively affect the performance
of the ESC system. Changes to the steering
system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely
affect ESC performance. Improperly
inflated and unevenly worn tires may also
degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle
modification or poor vehicle maintenance
that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC
system can increase the risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
WARNING!
(Continued)
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 58
SAFETY 59
NOTE:
To improve the vehicle's traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow,
sand or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to
the “Partial Off” mode by pushing the “ESC OFF”
switch. Once the situation requiring ESC to be
switched to the “Partial Off” mode is overcome,
turn ESC back on by momentarily pushing the
“ESC OFF” switch. This may be done while the
vehicle is in motion.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light in the instrument
cluster will come on when the igni-
tion is turned to the ON mode. It
should go out with the engine running. If the
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected
in the ESC system. If this light remains on
after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle
has been driven several miles (kilometers)
at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h),
see an authorized dealer as soon as
possible to have the problem diagnosed
and corrected.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light (located in the instrument cluster)
starts to flash as soon as the tires lose trac-
tion and the ESC system becomes active.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light also flashes when TCS is active. If the
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
begins to flash during acceleration, ease up
on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your
speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
NOTE:
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light and the ESC OFF Indicator Light
come on momentarily each time the igni-
tion switch is turned ON.
Each time the ignition is turned on, the
ESC system will be on even if it was turned
off previously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or
clicking sounds when it is active. This is
normal; the sounds will stop when ESC
becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indi-
cates the Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) is off.
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS func-
tionality of ESC, (except for the limited slip
feature described in the TCS section), has
been disabled and the “ESC Off Indicator
Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial
Off” mode, the engine power reduction
feature of TCS is disabled, and the
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the
ESC system is reduced.
Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when
the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
4
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 59
60 SAFETY
(Continued)
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The Hill Start Assist (HSA) system is designed to
assist the driver when starting a vehicle from a stop
on a hill. HSA will maintain the level of brake pres-
sure the driver applied for a short period of time
after the driver takes their foot off of the brake
pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle during
this short period of time, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill.
The system will release brake pressure in proportion
to the amount of throttle applied as the vehicle
starts to move in the intended direction of travel.
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA
to activate:
Vehicle must be stopped
Vehicle must be on a 6% (approximate) grade or
greater hill
Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear;
vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE (R) gear)
HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears
when the activation criteria have been met. The
system will not activate if the vehicle is placed in
NEUTRAL (N) or PARK (P).
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll
back while towing a trailer.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The Traction Control System (TCS) monitors the
amount of wheel spin of each of the driven
wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure
is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced, to provide enhanced accelera-
tion and stability. A feature of the TCS system,
Brake Limited Differential (BLD), functions
similar to a limited slip differential and controls
the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel
on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other,
the system will apply the brake of the spinning
wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be
applied to the wheel that is not spinning. This
feature remains active even if the ESC is in the
“Partial Off” mode.
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills with
a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer,
when the system will not activate and slight
rolling may occur. This could cause a
collision with another vehicle or object.
Always remember the driver is responsible
for braking the vehicle.
WARNING!
If you use a trailer brake controller with
your trailer, the trailer brakes may be acti-
vated and deactivated with the brake
switch. If so, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold both the vehicle
and the trailer on a hill when the brake
pedal is released. In order to avoid rolling
down an incline while resuming accelera-
tion, manually activate the trailer brake
or apply more vehicle brake pressure
prior to releasing the brake pedal.
HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply
the parking brake fully when exiting your
vehicle. Also, be certain to place the trans-
mission in PARK.
Failure to follow these warnings can result
in a collision or serious personal injury.
WARNING!
(Continued)
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 60
SAFETY 61
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
(in the instrument cluster) will start to flash as
soon as the tires lose traction and the wheels
begin to spin. This indicates that the TCS is
active. If the indicator light flashes during accel-
eration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as
little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your
speed and driving to the prevailing road condi-
tions, and do not switch off the ESC or TCS.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) — If Equipped
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) uses sensors in the
vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying
trailer and will take the appropriate actions to
attempt to stop the sway. The system may
reduce engine power and apply the brake of
the appropriate wheel(s) to counteract the
sway of the trailer. TSC will become active
automatically once an excessively swaying
trailer is recognized.
NOTE:
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying.
Always use caution when towing a trailer and
follow the trailer tongue weight recommenda-
tions. Refer to “Trailer Towing” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light will flash, the engine
power may be reduced, and you may feel the
brakes being applied to individual wheels to
attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is
disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial
Off” mode.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based
on the vehicle recommended cold placard pres-
sure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This
means that when the outside temperature
decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire
pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven
for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the
tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for information on how to prop-
erly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure
will also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is
normal and there should be no adjustment for
this increased pressure.
WARNING!
The TCS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase the traction afforded.
The TCS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, or hydroplaning.
The capabilities of a TCS-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner, which could jeopardize
the user's safety or the safety of others.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the
vehicle down, stop at the nearest safe
location, and adjust the trailer load to
eliminate trailer sway.
4
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 61
62 SAFETY
(Continued)
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pres-
sure if the tire pressure falls below the low-pres-
sure warning limit for any reason, including low
temperature effects and natural pressure loss
through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low
tire pressure as long as the condition exists,
and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at
or above the recommended cold placard pres-
sure. Once the low tire pressure warning (TPMS
Warning Light) illuminates, you must increase
the tire pressure to the recommended cold
placard pressure in order for the TPMS Warning
Light to turn off. The system will automatically
update and the TPMS Warning Light will turn off
once the system receives the updated tire pres-
sures. The vehicle may need to be driven for up
to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard
pressure in order to turn the TPMS Warning
Light off.
For example, your vehicle may have a recom-
mended cold (parked for more than three
hours) placard pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa).
If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C)
and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi
(186 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F
(-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to
approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn on
the TPMS Warning Light. Driving the vehicle
may cause the tire pressure to rise to approx-
imately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the TPMS
Warning Light will still be on. In this situation,
the TPMS Warning Light will turn off only after
the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recom-
mended cold placard pressure value.
NOTE:
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal
tire care and maintenance or to provide
warning of a tire failure or condition.
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pres-
sure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the orig-
inal equipment tires and wheels. TPMS
pressures and warning have been estab-
lished for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or
sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the
same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket
wheels can cause sensor damage.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After
using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to
an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-
sure always reinstall the valve stem cap.
This will prevent moisture and dirt from
entering the valve stem, which could
damage the TPMS sensor.
CAUTION!
(Continued)
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 62
SAFETY 63
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsi-
bility to maintain correct tire pressure using
an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if
under-inflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the TPMS Warning
Light.
Seasonal temperature changes will affect
tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the
actual tire pressure in the tire.
Base System
This is the TPMS warning indicator
located in the instrument cluster.
The TPMS uses wireless technology
with wheel rim mounted electronic
sensors to monitor tire pressure levels.
Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the
valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to
the Receiver Module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle
regularly and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
Receiver Module
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring sensors
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster, an
audible chime will be activated, and the “Check
tire pressure” message will display when one or
more of the four active road tire pressures are
low. Should this occur, you should stop as soon
as possible, check the inflation pressure of
each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to
the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pres-
sure value. The system will automatically
update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Light
will extinguish once the updated tire pressures
have been received. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) to receive this information.
Check TPMS Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
remain on solid when a system fault is detected,
an audible chime will be activated and the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Unavailable” message will
display. If the ignition key is cycled, this
sequence will repeat providing the system fault
still exists. The TPMS Warning Light will turn off
when the fault condition no longer exists. A
system fault can occur with any of the following
scenarios:
Jamming due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio
frequencies as the TPM sensors
Installing some form of aftermarket window
tinting that affects radio wave signals
Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings
Using tire chains on the vehicle
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM
sensors
4
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 63
64 SAFETY
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with a regular size
spare wheel.
1. The spare tire does not have a TPM sensor.
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the
pressure in the spare tire.
2. If a spare tire not equipped with the Tire
Pressure Monitoring sensor is used, the
TPMS Warning Light will turn on, flashing for
75 seconds and then remaining solid for
each subsequent ignition key cycle.
3. Once you repair or replace the original road
tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of
the spare tire, the TPMS will update auto-
matically and the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Light will extinguish once the updated tire
pressures have been received. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this
information.
NOTE:
For correct Tire Pressure Monitoring behavior,
please wait for about 20 minutes in key-off
during each tire substitution.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Develop-
ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts
de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
lage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-
ettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-
quier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in
your vehicle are the restraint systems:
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
Seat Belt Systems
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air
Bags
Child Restraints
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 64
SAFETY 65
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in
this section. It tells you how to use your restraint
system properly, to keep you and your passen-
gers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to
minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air
bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should
always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the
vehicle seat belt properly (Refer to “Child
Restraints” in this section for further infor-
mation) must be secured in the appropriate
child restraint or belt-positioning booster
seat in a rear seating position.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the
front passenger seat, move the seat as far
back as possible and use the proper child
restraint (Refer to “Child Restraints” in this
section for further information).
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder
belt behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided
with your child restraint to make sure that
you are using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap
and shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should
be moved back as far as practical to allow
the front air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If
your vehicle has side air bags, and deploy-
ment occurs, the side air bags will inflate
forcefully into the space between occupants
and the door and occupants could be
injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to
be modified to accommodate a disabled
person, refer to the “Customer Assistance”
section for customer service contact infor-
mation.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
4
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 65
66 SAFETY
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent
driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road
may be a poor driver and could cause a collision
that includes you. This can happen far away
from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives,
and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries
in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen
when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat
belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the
vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be
belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver and Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind
the driver and outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The
BeltAlert feature is active whenever the igni-
tion switch is in the AVV/START or MAR/RUN
position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition
switch is first in the AVV/START or MAR/RUN
position, a chime will signal for a few seconds. If
the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch
is first in the AVV/START or MAR/RUN position
the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and
remain on until both outboard front seat belts
are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front
passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated
when the vehicle is moving above a specified
vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard
front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
(the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning
sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent
chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will remain on until the seat belts are buckled.
The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat
based on vehicle speed until the driver and
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Change of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the
vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning
sequence will begin until the seat belts are
buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered
when an animal or other items are placed on
the outboard front passenger seat or when the
seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recom-
mended that pets be restrained in the rear seat
(if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers
that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is
properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an
authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recom-
mend deactivating BeltAlert.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 66
SAFETY 67
(Continued)
(Continued)
(Continued)
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver
or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until the driver and
outboard front seat passenger seat belts are
buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are
equipped with lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only
during very sudden stops or collisions. This
feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt
to move freely with you under normal condi-
tions. However, in a collision the seat belt will
lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside
of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, the air bags
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat
belt even though you have air bags.
In a collision, you and your passengers can
suffer much greater injuries if you are not
properly buckled up. You can strike the inte-
rior of your vehicle or other passengers, or
you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always
be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly. Occupants,
including the driver, should always wear
their seat belts whether or not an air bag is
also provided at their seating position to
minimize the risk of severe injury or death
in the event of a crash.
WARNING!
(Continued)
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or
you could even slide out of the seat belt.
Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
Two people should never be belted into a
single seat belt. People belted together can
crash into one another in a collision, hurting
one another badly. Never use a lap/
shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one
person, no matter what their size.
WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the
risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt
forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic
bones, but across your abdomen. Always
wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
WARNING!
(Continued)
4
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 67
68 SAFETY
(Continued)
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit
back and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back
of the front seat, and next to your arm in the
rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear
seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull out the
seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the
seat belt to go around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
A twisted seat belt may not protect you
properly. In a collision, it could even cut into
you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against
your body, without twists. If you can’t
straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it
to an authorized dealer immediately and
have it fixed.
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong
buckle will not protect you properly. The lap
portion could ride too high on your body,
possibly causing internal injuries. Always
buckle your seat belt into the buckle
nearest you.
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect
you properly. In a sudden stop, you could
move too far forward, increasing the possi-
bility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
WARNING!
(Continued)
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the
inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,
increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt
worn under the arm can cause internal inju-
ries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your
shoulder so that your strongest bones will
take the force in a collision.
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
protect you from injury during a collision.
You are more likely to hit your head in a
collision if you do not wear your shoulder
belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to
be used together.
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in
a collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-
ately. Do not disassemble or modify the
seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision.
WARNING!
(Continued)
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 68
SAFETY 69
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a “click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and
lies low across your hips, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt
portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To
loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the
latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under
the seat belt in a collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will with-
draw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the buckle. The seat belt will automati-
cally retract to its stowed position. If neces-
sary, slide the latch plate down the webbing
to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible
to the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
the latch plate, grasp and twist the seat belt
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that
begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
webbing. The folded webbing must enter
the slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
clears the folded webbing and the seat belt
is no longer twisted.
4
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 69
70 SAFETY
(Continued)
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger
seats, the top of the shoulder belt can be
adjusted upward or downward to position the
seat belt away from your neck. Push or squeeze
the anchorage button to release the anchorage,
and move it up or down to the position that
serves you best.
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you
will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a
lower position, and if you are taller than
average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up
or down to make sure that it is locked in posi-
tion.
Adjustable Anchorage
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage
is equipped with an Easy Up feature. This
feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to
be adjusted in the upward position without
pushing or squeezing the release button. To
verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched,
pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage
until it is locked into position.
WARNING!
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or
you could even slide out of the seat belt.
Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 70
SAFETY 71
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants
including pregnant women: the risk of injury in
the event of an accident is reduced for the
mother and the unborn child if they are wearing
a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the
abdomen and across the strong bones of the
hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest
and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with
pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of
a collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack
from the seat belt early in a collision. Preten-
sioners work for all size occupants, including
those in child restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper
seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat
belt still must be worn snugly and positioned
properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occu-
pant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air
bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A
deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag
must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front seat belt system is equipped with an
Energy Management feature that may help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a
collision. The seat belt system has a retractor
assembly that is designed to release webbing in
a controlled manner.
Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will with-
draw any slack in the shoulder belt.
Misadjustment of the seat belt could
reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt
in a crash.
Always make all seat belt height adjust-
ments when the vehicle is stationary.
WARNING!
(Continued)
4
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 71
72 SAFETY
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
The seat belt in the passenger seating position
is equipped with a Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure
a child restraint system. For additional informa-
tion, refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using
The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
Restraints” section of this manual. The figure
below illustrates the locking feature for each
seating position.
Front Bucket Seat: Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) Location
Front Bench Seat: Switchable Automatic Locking Re-
tractor (ALR) Locations
If the passenger seating position is equipped
with an ALR and is being used for normal usage,
only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound
as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then care-
fully pull out only the amount of webbing neces-
sary to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a "click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a
child restraint is installed in a seating position
that has a seat belt with this feature. Children
12 years old and under should always be prop-
erly restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle with
a rear seat.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 72
SAFETY 73
(Continued)
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull down-
ward until the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat
belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the seat belt is now in the
Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt
and allow it to retract completely to disengage
the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you
in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the internal circuits and inter-
connecting wiring associated with the electrical
Air Bag System Components. Your vehicle may
be equipped with the following Air Bag System
Components:
Air Bag System Components
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the readiness of the
electronic parts of the air bag system
whenever the ignition switch is in the
AVV/START or MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position. If
the ignition switch is in the STOP/OFF/LOCK
position the air bag system is not on and the air
bags will not inflate.
WARNING!
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if
the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function
is not working properly when checked
according to the procedures in the Service
Manual.
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
could increase the risk of injury in colli-
sions.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to
restrain occupants who are wearing the
seat belt or children who are using booster
seats. The locked mode is only used to
install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for
restraining the child.
WARNING!
(Continued)
4
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 73
74 SAFETY
The ORC contains a backup power supply
system that may deploy the air bag system even
if the battery loses power or it becomes discon-
nected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in
the instrument panel for approximately four to
eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition
switch is in the MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position.
After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light
will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in
any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag
Warning Light, either momentarily or continu-
ously. A single chime will sound to alert you if
the light comes on again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illu-
minate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning
Light if a malfunction is detected that could
affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also
record the nature of the malfunction. While the
air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on
during the four to eight seconds when the
ignition switch is first in the MAR/ACC/ON/
RUN position.
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after
the four to eight-second interval.
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit-
tently or remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be
disabled. In this condition the air bags may not
be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder
belts for both the driver and front passenger.
The front air bags are a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver front air bag is
mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compart-
ment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are
embossed on the air bag covers.
Front Air Bag Locations
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t have
the air bag system to protect you in a
collision. If the light does not come on as a
bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it
comes on as you drive, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
1 — Driver Front Air Bag
2 — Passenger Front Air Bag
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 74
SAFETY 75
(Continued)
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
The driver and passenger front air bag system is
designed to inflate based on the severity and
type of collision as determined by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive
information from the front impact sensors (if
equipped) or other system components.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi-
tional protection by supplementing the seat
belts. Front air bags are not expected to reduce
the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover colli-
sions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may
produce substantial vehicle damage — for
example, some pole collisions, truck under-
rides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and
location of impact, front air bags may deploy in
crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but
that produce a severe initial deceleration.
WARNING!
Being too close to the steering wheel or
instrument panel during front air bag
deployment could cause serious injury,
including death. Air bags need room to
inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending
your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
WARNING!
No objects should be placed over or near
the air bag on the instrument panel or
steering wheel because any such objects
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a colli-
sion severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
Do not put anything on or around the air
bag covers or attempt to open them manu-
ally. You may damage the air bags and you
could be injured because the air bags may
no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags
are inflating.
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts
even though you have air bags.
WARNING!
(Continued)
4
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 75
76 SAFETY
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle
deceleration over time, vehicle speed and
damage by themselves are not good indicators
of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in
all collisions, and also are needed to help keep
you in position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the
front air bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate
the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the
upper passenger side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air bags
inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully
inflate in less time than it takes to blink your
eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate
while helping to restrain the driver and front
passenger.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs) are located in the outboard side of the
front seats. The SABs are marked with “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat
trim on the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occu-
pant injury during certain side impacts, in addi-
tion to the injury reduction potential provided by
the seat belts and body structure.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on
the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover.
The inflating SAB deploys through the seat
seam into the space between the occupant and
the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed
and with such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if
items are positioned in the area where the SAB
inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of
injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place
objects between you and the Side Air Bags;
the performance could be adversely affected
and/or objects could be pushed into you,
causing serious injury.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 76
SAFETY 77
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs) are located above the side windows.
The trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and
other injuries to front and rear seat outboard
occupants in certain side impacts, in addition to
the injury reduction potential provided by the
seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side
windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside
edge of the headliner out of the way and covers
the window. The SABICs inflate with enough
force to injure occupants if they are not belted
and seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a
deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial
or complete ejection of vehicle occupants
through side windows in certain side impact
events.
WARNING!
Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage
or other cargo up high enough to block the
deployment of the SABICs. The trim
covering above the side windows where the
SABIC and its deployment path are located
should remain free from any obstructions.
In order for the SABICs to work as intended,
do not install any accessory items in your
vehicle which could alter the roof. Do not
add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle.
Do not add roof racks that require perma-
nent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill
into the roof of the vehicle for any reason.
4
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 77
78 SAFETY
(Continued)
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether the
deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
impact event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. The side impact
sensors aid the ORC in determining the appro-
priate response to impact events. The system is
calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the
impact side of the vehicle during impacts that
require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side
impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy inde-
pendently; a left side impact deploys the left
Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact
deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of
whether or not Side Air Bags should have
deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side colli-
sions, including some collisions at certain
angles, or some side collisions that do not
impact the area of the passenger compartment.
The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or
offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less
time than it takes to blink your eyes.
WARNING!
Occupants, including children, who are up
against or very close to Side Air Bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants,
including children, should never lean on or
sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the side air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where
appropriate) are necessary for your protec-
tion in all collisions. They also help keep
you in position, away from an inflating Side
Air Bag. To get the best protection from the
Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their
backs against the seats. Children must be
properly restrained in a child restraint or
booster seat that is appropriate for the size
of the child.
WARNING!
(Continued)
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 78
SAFETY 79
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the inte-
rior trim, but they will open during air bag
deployment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are
designed to activate in certain rollover events.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) deter-
mines whether deployment in a particular roll-
over event is appropriate, based on the severity
and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is
not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air
Bags and seat belt pretensioners should have
deployed.
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners
will not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover
sensing system determines if a rollover event
may be in progress and whether deployment is
appropriate. In the event the vehicle experi-
ences a rollover or near rollover event, and
deployment is appropriate, the rollover sensing
system will deploy the side air bags and seat
belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial
or complete ejection of vehicle occupants
through side windows in certain rollover or side
impact events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
tors the internal circuits and interconnecting
wiring associated with electrical Air Bag System
Components listed below:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
WARNING!
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not
lean against the door or window. Sit upright
in the center of the seat.
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely
injured or killed.
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could
lead to more severe injuries in a collision.
The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt
to restrain you properly. In some collisions,
Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
4
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 79
80 SAFETY
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate imme-
diately after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is
wrong with the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air
bags, any or all of the following may occur:
The air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occu-
pants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or
those you might get sliding along a carpet or
gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not perma-
nent and normally heal quickly. However, if
you haven’t healed significantly within a few
days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
As the air bags deflate, you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a
normal by-product of the process that gener-
ates the non-toxic gas used for air bag infla-
tion. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or
eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water.
For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air.
If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If
these particles settle on your clothing, follow
the garment manufacturer’s instructions for
cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another collision,
the air bags will not be in place to protect you.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the inte-
rior trim, but they will open during air bag
deployment.
After any collision, the vehicle should be
taken to an authorized dealer immediately.
Fuel Cut Off Switch
Your vehicle is equipped with a Fuel Cut Off
switch. In the event of an accident, if the
communication network remains intact, and
the power remains intact, depending on the
nature of the event, the Fuel Cut Off Switch may
perform the following functions:
Cut off fuel to the engine and turn off the
engine.
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has
power or until the hazard light button is
pressed. The hazard lights can be deacti-
vated by pressing the hazard light button.
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on
as long as the battery has power.
Unlock the power door locks.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt
pretensioners cannot protect you in another
collision. Have the air bags, seat belt
pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Also, have the Occupant
Restraint Controller System serviced as well.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 80
SAFETY 81
(Continued)
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the igni-
tion to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and
remove the key from the ignition switch to avoid
draining the battery. Carefully check the vehicle
for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on
the ground near the engine compartment and
fuel tank before resetting the system and
starting the engine. If there are no fuel leaks or
damage to the vehicle electrical devices (e.g.
headlights) after an accident, reset the Fuel Cut
Off Switch by following the procedure described
below. If you have any doubt, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
Fuel Cut Off Switch Reset Procedure
In order to reset the Fuel Cut Off Switch after an
event push the “A” Button located underneath
the instrument panel on the passenger side.
Fuel Cut Off Switch
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
If, after an accident, you smell fuel or see
leaks from the fuel system, do not reset the
Fuel Cut Off Switch to avoid the risk of fire.
Before resetting the Fuel Cut Off Switch,
carefully check for fuel leaks or damage to
the vehicle electrical devices (e.g.
headlights).
WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the air bag
system could cause it to fail when you need
it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to protect you. Do not modify
the components or wiring, including adding
any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper
passenger side of the instrument panel. Do
not modify the front bumper, vehicle body
structure, or add aftermarket side steps or
running boards.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of
the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell
anyone who works on your vehicle that it
has an air bag system.
4
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 81
82 SAFETY
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds
or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better under-
standing of the circumstances in which crashes
and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce-
ment, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip-
ment is required, and access to the vehicle or
the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have the special equipment,
can read the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
Do not attempt to modify any part of your
air bag system. The air bag may inflate acci-
dentally or may not function properly if
modifications are made. Take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer for any air bag
system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be
serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment
bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat
accessories may be used. If it is necessary
to modify the air bag system for persons
with disabilities, contact an authorized
dealer.
WARNING!
(Continued)
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 82
SAFETY 83
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up
at all times, including babies and children. Every
state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in
proper restraint systems. This is the law, and
you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride prop-
erly buckled up in a rear seat, if available.
According to crash statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear seats
rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints
for children from newborn size to the child
almost large enough for an adult safety belt.
Always check the child seat Owner’s Manual to
make sure you have the correct seat for your
child. Carefully read and follow all the instruc-
tions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the
child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure
that it has a label certifying that it meets all
applicable Safety Standards. You should also
make sure that you can install it in the vehicle
where you will use it.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or
call: 1–888–327–4236
Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehicle-
safety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can
become a projectile inside the vehicle. The
force required to hold even an infant on your
lap could become so great that you could not
hold the child, no matter how strong you are.
The child and others could be badly injured or
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should
be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
4
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 83
84 SAFETY
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or younger and
who have not reached the height or weight limits
of their child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Small Children Children who are at least two years old or who
have outgrown the height or weight limit of their
rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point
Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Larger Children Children who have outgrown their forward-facing
child restraint, but are too small to properly fit
the vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle
seat belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints Children 12 years old or younger, who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their
booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the
vehicle
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 84
SAFETY 85
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years
old or until they reach either the height or
weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint.
Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child
seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from
birth until they reach the weight or height limit of
the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be
used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a
higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction
than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their
infant carrier but are still less than at least two
years old. Children should remain rear-facing
until they reach the highest weight or height
allowed by their convertible child seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have
outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat
can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.
Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are
for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height
limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat.
Children should remain in a forward-facing child
seat with a harness for as long as possible, up
to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above
the forward-facing limit for the child seat
should use a belt-positioning booster seat
until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the
child cannot sit with knees bent over the
vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back
is against the seatback, they should use a
belt-positioning booster seat. The child and
belt-positioning booster seat are held in the
vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
4
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 85
86 SAFETY
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are
long enough to bend over the front of the seat
when their back is against the seatback, should
use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple
5-step test to decide whether the child can use
the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the
back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
the front of the vehicle seat – while the child
is still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
shoulder between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not the
stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the
whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was
“no,” then the child still needs to use a booster
seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/
shoulder belt, check seat belt fit periodically
and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the
belt out of position. If the shoulder belt
contacts the face or neck, move the child
closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a
booster seat to position the seat belt on the
child correctly.
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of
an infant or child restraint. It could come
loose in a collision. The child could be badly
injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
After a child restraint is installed in the
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat
forward or rearward because it can loosen
the child restraint attachments. Remove
the child restraint before adjusting the
vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat
has been adjusted, reinstall the child
restraint.
When your child restraint is not in use,
secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or
LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the
vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle.
In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike
the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
under an arm or behind their back. In a crash,
the shoulder belt will not protect a child
properly, which may result in serious injury or
death. A child must always wear both the lap
and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 86
SAFETY 87
Installing Child Restraints In Commercial Vehicles
This commercial vehicle is not designed for use
as a family vehicle and is not intended for
carrying children in the front passenger seat(s).
Never install rear-facing child restraints in this
vehicle. Although the seat belt can be locked to
secure a child restraint, there are no tether
anchorages to complete the proper installation
of a forward-facing child restraint. If you must
carry a child in a forward-facing child restraint,
the passenger seat should be moved to the full
rearward position and the child must be in a
proper restraint system based on its age, size
and weight. Follow the instructions below to
secure the child restraint using the seat belt.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
The seat belts in the passenger seating posi-
tions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR). This seat belt is
designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt
tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR
retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode
by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor
and then letting the webbing retract back into
the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a
clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic
Locking Mode” description in “Switchable Auto-
matic Locking Retractors (ALR)” under “Occu-
pant Restraint Systems” for additional
information on ALR.
Front Bucket Seat Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) Location
WARNING!
Rear-facing infant restraints must never be
secured in the passenger seat of a vehicle
with a passenger air bag. In a collision, a
passenger air bag may deploy causing severe
injury or death to infants riding in rear-facing
infant restraints.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
4
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 87
88 SAFETY
Front Bench Seat Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Locations
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from
the retractor to pass it through the belt path
of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt
webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion
tight against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the
shoulder part of the belt until you have
pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the
retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
means the seat belt is now in the Automatic
Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor.
If it is locked, you should not be able to pull
out any webbing. If the retractor is not
locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
8. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
seat at the belt path. It should not move
more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direc-
tion.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so
check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if
necessary.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 88
SAFETY 89
(Continued)
(Continued)
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown
about and possibly injured, or injure a
passenger during panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if
equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that
are secured by seat belts.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE
CARGO AREA.
Exhaust Gas
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly main-
tained engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of
the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can
be detected inside the vehicle, or when the
underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged,
have a competent mechanic inspect the
complete exhaust system and adjacent body
areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose
connections could permit exhaust fumes to
seep into the passenger compartment. In addi-
tion, inspect the exhaust system each time the
vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change.
Replace as required.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you
unconscious and can eventually poison you.
To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety
tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or
in confined areas any longer than needed
to move your vehicle in or out of the area.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/
liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that all
windows are closed and the climate control
BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO
NOT use the recirculation mode.
WARNING!
(Continued)
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle
with the engine running, adjust your
heating or cooling controls to force outside
air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high
speed.
WARNING!
(Continued)
4
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 89
90 SAFETY
(Continued)
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced
after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must
be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt
or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light will turn on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when
the ignition switch is first turned to ON/
RUN. If the light is either not on during
starting, stays on, or turns on while driving,
have the system inspected at an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. After the bulb
check, this light will illuminate with a single
chime when a fault with the Air Bag System
has been detected. It will stay on until the
fault is removed. If the light comes on inter-
mittently or remains on while driving, have
an authorized dealer service the vehicle
immediately.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode
and place the blower control on high speed. You
should be able to feel the air directed against
the windshield. See an authorized dealer for
service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. Only use a floor mat that does not inter-
fere with the operation of the accelerator, brake
or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat that is
securely attached using the floor mat fasteners
so it cannot slip out of position and interfere
with the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or
impair safe operation of your vehicle in other
ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat
fasteners may cause your floor mat to
interfere with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat
using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT
install your floor mat upside down or turn
your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm
mat is secured using the floor mat
fasteners on a regular basis.
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR
MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before
installing any other floor mat. NEVER install
or stack an additional floor mat on top of an
existing floor mat.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 90
SAFETY 91
(Continued)
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and
uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails,
glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or
sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks.
Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel bolts for tightness. Check the
tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation
pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the
controls. Check turn signal and high beam indi-
cator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight
parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks.
Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that
cannot be properly attached and secured to
your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be
replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year
of your vehicle.
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the
driver’s side floor area. To check for inter-
ference, with the vehicle properly parked
with the engine off, fully depress the accel-
erator, the brake, and the clutch pedal (if
present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of
any pedal, or is not secure to the floor,
remove the floor mat from the vehicle and
place the floor mat in your trunk.
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on
the passenger’s side floor area.
WARNING!
(Continued)
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or
slide into the driver’s side floor area when
the vehicle is moving. Objects can become
trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle
control.
NEVER place any objects under the floor
mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects
could change the position of the floor mat
and may cause interference with the accel-
erator, brake, or clutch pedals.
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet
to the floor and check the floor mat
fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet.
Fully depress each pedal to check for inter-
ference with the accelerator, brake, or
clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.
It is recommended to only use mild soap
and water to clean your floor mats. After
cleaning, always check your floor mat has
been properly installed and is secured to
your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
WARNING!
(Continued)
4
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 91
92
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and
fasten your seat belts.
Automatic Transmission
The gear selector must be in the PARK or
NEUTRAL position before you can start the
engine. Press the brake pedal before shifting to
any driving gear.
NOTE:
You must press the brake pedal before shifting
out of PARK.
Normal Starting
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing
the accelerator pedal.
Turn the ignition switch to the AVV (START) posi-
tion and release it when the engine starts. If the
engine fails to start within 10 seconds, turn the
ignition switch to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) posi-
tion, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
“Normal Starting” procedure.
Cold Weather Operation (Below –22°F Or
−30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these tempera-
tures, use of an externally powered electric
engine block heater (available from your autho-
rized dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails To Start
If the engine fails to start after you have
followed the “Normal Starting” procedure, it
may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all
the way to the floor and hold it there. Crank the
engine for no more than 15 seconds. This
should clear any excess fuel in case the engine
is flooded. Leave the ignition key in the RUN
position, release the accelerator pedal and
repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren). A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 92
STARTING AND OPERATING 93
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and
it will decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect
the cord to a standard 110-115 Volt AC elec-
trical outlet with a grounded, three-wire exten-
sion cord.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at
least one hour to have an adequate warming
effect on the engine.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the
engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in
your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
(500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are
desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration
within the limits of local traffic laws contributes
to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle accelera-
tion in low gear can be detrimental and should
be avoided.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid
into the throttle body air inlet opening in an
attempt to start the vehicle. This could
result in flash fire causing serious personal
injury.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle
to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission cannot be started
this way. Unburned fuel could enter the
catalytic converter and once the engine has
started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a
start from a booster battery or the battery in
another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly. Refer to
“Jump Starting Procedure” in “In Case Of
Emergency” for further information.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not
continuously crank the engine for more than
25 seconds at a time. Wait 60 seconds
before trying again.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block
heater cord before driving. Damage to the
110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause
electrocution.
5
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 93
94 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
The engine oil installed in the engine at the
factory is a high-quality energy conserving type
lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with
anticipated climate conditions under which
vehicle operations will occur. For the recom-
mended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
“Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifica-
tions”.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of opera-
tion. This should be considered a normal part of
the break-in and not interpreted as a problem.
Please check your oil level with the engine oil
indicator often during the break in period. Add
oil as required.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the
parking brake is fully applied.
The parking brake lever is located on the
outboard side of the driver’s seat. To apply the
parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as
possible. To release the parking brake, pull the
lever up slightly, push the release button with
your thumb, then lower the lever completely.
Parking Brake
When the parking brake is applied with the igni-
tion switch in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position,
the Brake Warning Light in the instrument
cluster will illuminate.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill
grade. The parking brake should always be
applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight
Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may
result.
1 — Parking Brake Release Button
2 — Parking Brake Lever
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally
injured.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 94
STARTING AND OPERATING 95
(Continued)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave a vehicle equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/
RUN mode. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disen-
gaged before driving; failure to do so can
lead to brake failure and a collision.
Always fully apply the parking brake when
leaving your vehicle or it may roll and cause
damage or injury. Also, be certain to leave
the transmission in PARK. Failure to do so
may cause the vehicle to roll and cause
damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on
with the parking brake released, a brake
system malfunction is indicated. Have the
brake system serviced by an authorized
dealer immediately.
WARNING!
(Continued)
WARNING!
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-
erate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting a
vehicle always come to a complete stop,
then apply the parking brake, shift the
transmission into PARK, turn the engine
OFF, and remove the ignition key. Once the
key is removed, the transmission is locked
in PARK, securing the vehicle against
unwanted movement.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the ignition key from the vehicle and lock
the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
Do not leave the ignition key in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren). A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
WARNING!
(Continued)
5
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 95
96 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park
Interlock which requires the transmission to be
in PARK before the ignition can be turned to the
LOCK/OFF (key removal) position. The key can
only be removed from the ignition when the igni-
tion is in the LOCK/OFF position, and once
removed the transmission is locked in PARK.
NOTE:
If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
key in the ignition to warn you that this safety
feature is inoperable. The engine can be started
and stopped but the key cannot be removed
until you obtain service.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmis-
sion Shift Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the
transmission gear selector in PARK unless the
brakes are applied. To shift the transmission
out of PARK, the ignition must be turned to the
ON/RUN mode (engine running or not), and the
brake pedal must be pressed.
NOTE:
Swivel seats that are unlocked can also prevent
the transmission gear selector from being
moved out of the PARK position. To shift the
transmission out of the PARK position the first
time after cranking is allowed, ensure swivel
seats are locked in the forward facing position.
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission
The transmission gear position display (located
in the instrument cluster) indicates the trans-
mission gear range. You must press the brake
pedal to move the gear selector out of PARK
(Refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock
System” in this section). To drive, move the gear
selector from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE
position.
The electronically-controlled transmission
provides a precise shift schedule. The transmis-
sion electronics are self-calibrating; therefore,
the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be
somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition,
and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Gear Selector
CAUTION!
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only
after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is
above idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure
your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 96
STARTING AND OPERATING 97
(Continued)
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE
when the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on
the brake pedal when shifting between these
gears.
The transmission gear selector provides PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and Electronic
Range Select (ERS) shift positions. Manual
downshifts can be made using the ERS shift
control. Moving the gear selector into the ERS
(-/+) position (beside the DRIVE position) acti-
vates ERS mode, displays the current gear in
the instrument cluster, and prevents automatic
upshifts beyond this gear. In ERS mode,
toggling the gear selector forward (-) or rear-
ward (+) will change the highest available gear.
Refer to "Electronic Range Select (ERS) Opera-
tion" in this section for further information.
NOTE:
If the gear selector cannot be moved to the
PARK, REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when
pushed forward) it is probably in the ERS (+/-)
position (beside the DRIVE position). In ERS
mode, the transmission gear limit (1, 2, 3, etc.)
is displayed in the instrument cluster. Move the
gear selector to the right (into the DRIVE [D]
position) for access to PARK, REVERSE, and
NEUTRAL.
Gear Ranges
Do not depress the accelerator pedal when
shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another
gear range.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment
to allow the selected gear to engage before
accelerating. This is especially important when
the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The engine can be
started in this range. Never attempt to use
PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the
parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift
the transmission into PARK first, and then apply
the parking brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
before shifting the transmission to PARK, other-
wise the load on the transmission locking mech-
anism may make it difficult to move the gear
selector out of PARK. As an added precaution,
turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill grade, and away from the curb on an
uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
Apply the parking brake.
Shift the transmission into PARK.
Turn the engine OFF.
Remove the ignition key.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle
to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
5
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 97
98 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
The following indicators should be used to
ensure that you have engaged the transmission
into the PARK position:
When shifting into PARK, firmly move the
gear selector all the way forward and to the
left until it stops and is fully seated.
Look at the transmission gear position
display and verify that it indicates the PARK
position (P).
With the brake pedal released, verify that the
gear selector will not move out of PARK.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the trans-
mission is in PARK before exiting the
vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-
erate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting a
vehicle always come to a complete stop,
then apply the parking brake, shift the
transmission into PARK, turn the engine
OFF, and remove the ignition key. Once the
key is removed, the transmission is locked
in PARK, securing the vehicle against
unwanted movement.
WARNING!
(Continued)
When exiting the vehicle, always remove
the ignition key from the vehicle and lock
the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
Do not leave the ignition key in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren). A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
WARNING!
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Before moving the transmission gear
selector out of PARK, you must turn the igni-
tion to the ON/RUN mode, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the
gear selector could result.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range,
as this can damage the drivetrain.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 98
STARTING AND OPERATING 99
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward.
Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has
come to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running. The
engine may be started in this range. Apply the
parking brake and shift the transmission into
PARK if you must exit the vehicle.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and
highway driving. It provides the smoothest
upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel
economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE
position provides optimum driving characteris-
tics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs
(such as when operating the vehicle under
heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, trav-
eling into strong head winds, or while towing a
heavy trailer), select TOW/HAUL mode or use
the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control
(refer to “Electronic Range Select (ERS) Opera-
tion” in this section for further information) to
select a lower gear range. Under these condi-
tions, using a lower gear range will improve
performance and extend transmission life by
reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
During cold temperatures, transmission opera-
tion may be modified depending on engine and
transmission temperature as well as vehicle
speed. This feature improves warm up time of
the engine and transmission to achieve
maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque
converter clutch is inhibited until the transmis-
sion fluid is warm refer to the “Note” under
“Torque Converter Clutch” in this section.
During extremely cold temperatures (-16°F
[-27°C] or below), operation may briefly be
limited to third gear only. Normal operation will
resume once the transmission temperature has
risen to a suitable level.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off
the ignition to coast down a hill. These are
unsafe practices that limit your response to
changing traffic or road conditions. You might
lose control of the vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with the transmission in
NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission
damage.
Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting
And Operating” and “Towing A Disabled
Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further
information.
5
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 99
100 STARTING AND OPERATING
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electroni-
cally for abnormal conditions. If a condition is
detected that could result in transmission
damage, Transmission Limp Home Mode is acti-
vated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in third gear regardless of which forward gear is
selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will
continue to operate. The Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Transmission
Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be
driven to an authorized dealer for service
without damaging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the trans-
mission can be reset to regain all forward gears
by performing the following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition OFF.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the
problem is no longer detected, the trans-
mission will return to normal operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we
recommend that you visit your authorized
dealer at your earliest possible convenience.
Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equip-
ment to assess the condition of your transmis-
sion.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized
dealer service is required.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control
allows the driver to limit the highest available
gear. For example, if you set the transmission
gear limit to 4 (fourth gear), the transmission
will not shift above fourth gear, but will shift
through the lower gears normally.
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode
at any vehicle speed. When the gear selector is
in the DRIVE position, the transmission will
operate automatically, shifting between all
available gears. Moving the gear selector to the
ERS position (beside DRIVE) will activate ERS
mode, display the current gear in the instru-
ment cluster, and set that gear as the top avail-
able gear. Once in ERS mode, moving the gear
selector forward (-) or rearward (+) will change
the top available gear.
To exit ERS mode, simply return the gear
selector to the DRIVE position.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine
braking on a slippery surface. The drive
wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle
could skid, causing a collision or personal
injury.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 100
STARTING AND OPERATING 101
NOTE:
To select the proper gear position for maximum
deceleration (engine braking), move the gear
selector into the ERS position, then tap it
forward (-) repeatedly as the vehicle slows. The
transmission will shift to the range from which
the vehicle can best be slowed down.
Overdrive Operation
The automatic transmission includes an elec-
tronically controlled Overdrive (sixth gear). The
transmission will automatically shift into Over-
drive if the following conditions are present:
The gear selector is in the DRIVE position.
The transmission fluid has reached an
adequate temperature.
The engine coolant has reached an adequate
temperature.
The vehicle speed is sufficiently high.
The driver is not heavily pressing the
accelerator.
When To Use TOW/HAUL Mode
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer,
carrying a heavy load, etc., and frequent trans-
mission shifting occurs, push the TOW/HAUL
switch to activate TOW/HAUL mode. This will
improve performance and reduce the potential
for transmission overheating or failure due to
excessive shifting. When operating in TOW/
HAUL mode, transmission upshifts are delayed,
and the transmission will automatically down-
shift (for engine braking) during steady braking
maneuvers.
The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate
in the instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/
HAUL mode has been activated. Pushing the
switch a second time restores normal opera-
tion. Normal operation is always the default at
engine start-up. If TOW/HAUL mode is desired,
the switch must be pushed each time the
engine is started.
Instrument
Cluster Display
1 2 3 4 5 6 D
Actual Gear(s)
Allowed
1 1–2 1–3 1–4 1–5 1–6 1–6
5
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 101
102 STARTING AND OPERATING
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy
has been included in the automatic transmis-
sion on your vehicle. A clutch within the torque
converter engages automatically at calibrated
speeds. This may result in a slightly different
feeling or response during normal operation in
the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops
or during some accelerations, the clutch auto-
matically disengages.
NOTE:
The torque converter clutch will not engage
until the transmission fluid and engine
coolant are warm [usually after 1 to 3 miles
(2 to 5 km) of driving]. Because the engine
speed is higher when the torque converter
clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the
transmission is not shifting into Overdrive
when cold. This is normal. Using the Elec-
tronic Range Select (ERS) shift control, when
the transmission is sufficiently warm, will
demonstrate that the transmission is able to
shift into and out of Overdrive.
If the vehicle has not been driven for several
days, the first few seconds of operation after
shifting the transmission into gear may seem
sluggish. This is due to the fluid partially
draining from the torque converter into the
transmission. This condition is normal and
will not cause damage to the transmission.
The torque converter will refill within five
seconds after starting the engine.
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give
you good vehicle response and increased ease
of maneuverability in tight spaces. The system
will provide mechanical steering capability if
power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is inter-
rupted, it will still be possible to steer your
vehicle. Under these conditions, you will
observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and
during parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
Increased noise levels at the end of the
steering wheel travel are considered normal
and do not indicate that there is a problem
with the power steering system.
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the
power steering pump may make noise for a
short amount of time. This is due to the cold,
thick fluid in the steering system. This noise
should be considered normal, and it does not
in any way damage the steering system.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at
the end of the steering wheel travel will
increase the steering fluid temperature and it
should be avoided when possible. Damage to
the power steering pump may occur.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 102
STARTING AND OPERATING 103
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a
defined service interval is not required. The fluid
should be checked at every oil change if a leak
is suspected, abnormal noises are apparent,
and/or the system is not functioning as antici-
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an
authorized dealer.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper
indicated level. With a clean cloth, wipe any
spilled fluid from all surfaces. Refer to “Fluids
And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”
for further information.
SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than
25 mph (40 km/h) up to the maximum speed of
100 mph (160 km/h).
The Speed Control lever is located on the left
side of the steering column.
Speed Control Lever
NOTE:
In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed
Control system has been designed to shut down
if multiple Speed Control functions are operated
at the same time. If this occurs, the Speed
Control system can be reactivated by rotating
the Speed Control ON/OFF center ring and
resetting the desired vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Rotate the center ring upward on the Speed
Control lever to turn the system on. The Cruise
Indicator Light in the instrument cluster display
will illuminate. To turn the system off, rotate the
center ring upward a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should
be turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level
surface and with the engine off to prevent
injury from moving parts and to ensure
accurate fluid level reading. Do not overfill.
Use only manufacturer's recommended
power steering fluid.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power
steering system as the chemicals can
damage your power steering components.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when
not in use is dangerous. You could
accidentally set the system or cause it to go
faster than you want. You could lose control
and have an accident. Always leave the
system off when you are not using it.
5
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 103
104 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Speed Control on. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, move the
Speed Control lever upward SET (+) and
release. Release the accelerator and the
vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
NOTE:
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady
speed and on level ground before moving the
Speed Control lever upward SET (+).
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase
speed by tapping the Speed Control lever up
SET (+).
The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the radio settings (if equipped). Refer to
”Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for more
information. The speed increment shown is
dependent on the chosen speed unit of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
Tapping the Speed Control lever up SET (+)
once will result in a 1 mph increase in set
speed. Each subsequent tap of the lever
results in an increase of 1 mph.
If the lever is continually held up, the set
speed will continue to increase until the lever
is released, then the new set speed will be
established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Tapping the Speed Control lever up SET (+)
once will result in a 1 km/h increase in set
speed. Each subsequent tap of the lever
results in an increase of 1 km/h.
If the lever is continually held up, the set
speed will continue to increase until the lever
is released, then the new set speed will be
established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can
decrease speed by tapping the Speed Control
lever down (-).
The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the radio settings if equipped. Refer to
”Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for more
information. The speed decrement shown is
dependent on the chosen speed unit of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
Tapping the Speed Control lever down (-)
once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set
speed. Each subsequent tap of the lever
results in a decrease of 1 mph.
If the lever is continually held down, the set
speed will continue to decrease until the
lever is released, then the new set speed will
be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Tapping the Speed Control lever down (-)
once will result in a 1 km/h decrease in set
speed. Each subsequent tap of the lever
results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
If the lever is continually held down, the set
speed will continue to decrease until the
lever is released, then the new set speed will
be established.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 104
STARTING AND OPERATING 105
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally.
When the pedal is released, the vehicle will
return to the set speed.
Using Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to
maintain the vehicle set speed.
NOTE:
The Speed Control system maintains speed up
and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may
occur so it may be preferable to drive without
Speed Control.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES
button and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h) up to the
maximum speed of 100 mph (160 km/h).
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the RES
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing
the vehicle will deactivate Speed Control
without erasing the set speed memory. Rotating
the center ring upward to turn the system off or
placing the ignition in the STOP (OFF/LOCK)
position erases the set speed memory.
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system
provides an audible indication of the distance
between the rear fascia/bumper and a
detected obstacle when backing up (e.g. during
a parking maneuver). Refer to “ParkSense
System Usage Precautions” in this section for
limitations of this system and recommenda-
tions.
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist is automati-
cally activated when the transmission is placed
into REVERSE. As the distance from an obstacle
behind the vehicle decreases, the audible alert
becomes more frequent.
Interaction With Trailer Towing
The Rear Park Assist system is automatically
deactivated when a trailer is hitched to the
vehicle. The system will be automatically acti-
vated as soon as the trailer is removed.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed.
Your vehicle could go too fast for the
conditions, and you could lose control and
have an accident. Do not use Speed Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding,
icy, snow-covered or slippery.
5
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 105
106 STARTING AND OPERATING
ParkSense Rear Park Assist Sensors
The four ParkSense Rear Park Assist sensors,
located in the rear fascia/bumper, monitor the
area behind the vehicle that is within the
sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles, in the horizontal direction, from
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
55 inches (140 cm) from the center of the rear
fascia/bumper and up to 24 inches (60 cm)
from the corners of the rear fascia/bumper,
depending on the location, type and orientation
of the obstacle.
Rear Park Assist Sensors Location
If several obstacles are detected, the Park-
Sense Rear Park Assist system indicates the
nearest obstacle.
The minimum height of a detectable obstacle
corresponds to the maximum height of an
obstacle that would clear the underside of the
vehicle during the parking maneuver.
ParkSense Rear Park Assist Alerts
If an obstacle is behind the vehicle when
REVERSE gear is engaged, an audible alert is
activated.
The tones emitted by the loudspeaker inform
the driver that the vehicle is approaching an
obstacle. The pauses between the tones are
directly proportional to the distance from the
obstacle. Pulses emitted in quick succession
indicate the presence of a very close obstacle. A
continuous tone indicates that the obstacle is
less than 12 inches (30 cm) away.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 106
STARTING AND OPERATING 107
Audible And Visual Signals Supplied By The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System
SIGNAL MEANING INDICATION
Obstacle Distance An obstacle is present within the sensors' field
of view
Audible Signal (dashboard loudspeaker)
• Sound pulses emitted at a rate that increases
as the distance decreases.
• Emits continuous tone at 12 inches (30 cm).
• Adjustable volume level programmable
through personal settings in the instrument
cluster display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel”.
Failure Sensor or System failures Visual Signal (instrument panel)
• Icon appears on display.
• Message is displayed in instrument cluster
display (if equipped).
5
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 107
108 STARTING AND OPERATING
While audible signals are emitted, the audio
system is not muted.
The audible signal is turned off immediately if
the distance increases. The tone cycle remains
constant if the distance measured by the inner
sensors is constant. If this condition occurs for
the external sensors, the signal is turned off
after three seconds (stopping warnings during
maneuvers parallel to walls).
ParkSense Rear Park Assist Failure
Indications
A malfunction of the ParkSense Rear Park
Assist sensors or system is indicated, during
REVERSE gear engagement, by the instrument
panel warning icon.
The warning icon is illuminated and a
message is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster display (if equipped).
Refer to “Warning Lights And
Messages” in “Getting To Know Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
The sensors and wiring are tested continuously
when the ignition is in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN)
position. Failures are indicated immediately if
they occur when the system is on.
Even if the system is able to identify that a
specific sensor is in failure condition, the instru-
ment cluster display shall indicate that the Park-
Sense Rear Park Assist system is unavailable,
without reference to the sensor in failure condi-
tion. If even a single sensor fails, the entire
system must be disabled. The system is turned
off automatically.
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors with water,
car wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use
rough or hard cloths. In washing stations, clean
sensors quickly keeping the vapor jet/high pres-
sure washing nozzles at least 4 inches (10 cm)
from the sensors. Do not scratch or poke the
sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the
sensors.
ParkSense Rear Park Assist System Usage
Precautions
NOTE:
Ensure that the outer surface and the under-
side of the rear bumper is clean and clear of
snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction to
keep the Rear Park Assist system operating
properly.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibra-
tions could affect the performance of Rear
Park Assist.
Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors regularly,
taking care not to scratch or damage them.
The sensors must not be covered with ice,
snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do
so can result in the system not working prop-
erly. The Rear Park Assist system might not
detect an obstacle behind the fascia/
bumper, or it could provide a false indication
that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
bumper.
Objects such as bicycle carriers, etc., must
not be placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from
the rear fascia/bumper while driving the
vehicle. Failure to do so can result in the
system misinterpreting a close object as a
sensor problem, causing a failure indication
to be displayed in the instrument cluster
display.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 108
STARTING AND OPERATING 109
If it’s necessary to keep the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly mounted for a long period,
it is possible to filter out the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly presence in sensor field of
view. The filtering operation must be performed
only by an authorized dealer.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
Your vehicle is equipped with the ParkView Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an
on-screen image of the rear surroundings of
your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put
into REVERSE and/or when the rear doors are
opened. The image will be displayed on the
touchscreen display along with a caution note
to “check entire surroundings” across the top of
the screen. After five seconds this note will
disappear. The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera
is located on the top rear of the vehicle below
the center light.
Rear Back Up Camera Location
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
and/or when the rear doors are closed, the rear
camera mode is exited and the navigation or
audio screen appears again.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using ParkSense. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind
you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure
to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly
recommended that the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly is disconnected from
the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury
or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer
to the obstacle than the rear fascia when
the loudspeaker sounds the continuous
tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending
on its size and shape, giving a false indica-
tion that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle,
including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or
below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when
using ParkSense in order to be able to stop
in time when an obstacle is detected. It is
recommended that the driver looks over
his/her shoulder when using ParkSense.
5
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 109
110 STARTING AND OPERATING
When displayed, static grid lines will illustrate the width of the vehicle and will show separate zones that will help indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle. The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone:
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens,
rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do
not cover the lens.
Zone Distance To The Rear Of The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
Green 3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using the Rear Back Up Camera.
Always check carefully behind your vehicle,
and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind
spots before backing up. You are responsible
for the safety of your surroundings and must
continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should
only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView
camera is unable to view every obstacle or
object in your drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must
be driven slowly when using ParkView to be
able to stop in time when an obstacle is
seen. It is recommended that the driver
look frequently over his/her shoulder when
using ParkView.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 110
STARTING AND OPERATING 111
(Continued)
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door
on the left side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is
lost or damaged, be sure the replacement cap
is for use with this vehicle.
Fuel Filler
NOTE:
During fuel fill, nozzle position could affect the
flow of fuel. For best results, allow the nozzle to
rest naturally in the filler tube - do not raise the
handle to increase the fill angle.
NOTE:
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the
fuel tank is full.
Tighten the fuel filler cap until you hear a
“clicking” sound. This is an indication that the
fuel filler cap is properly tightened.
If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the
MIL may come on. Be sure the gas cap is
tightened every time the vehicle is refueled.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that
the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed,
or damaged, a “Check fuel cap” message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster display.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information. Tighten the fuel filler cap
until a “clicking” sound is heard. This is an indi-
cation that the fuel filler cap is properly tight-
ened. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic System” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
If the problem continues, the message will
appear the next time the vehicle is started. See
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open
or the tank is being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the
“Malfunction Indicator Light” to turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a
vehicle. You could be burned. Always place
fuel containers on the ground while filling.
CAUTION!
Damage to the fuel system or emissions
control system could result from using an
improper fuel tank filler tube cap.
A poorly fitting fuel filler cap could let impu-
rities into the fuel system.
A poorly fitting fuel filler cap may cause the
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn
on.
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not
“top off” the fuel tank after filling. When the
fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
WARNING!
(Continued)
5
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 111
112 STARTING AND OPERATING
VEHICLE LOADING
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration regulations, your vehicle has a
certification label affixed to the driver's side
door or B-Pillar.
If seats are removed for carrying cargo, do not
exceed the specified GVWR and GAWR.
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label
affixed to the drivers side B-Pillar or the rear of
the driver’s door.
The label contains the following information:
Name of manufacturer
Month and year of manufacture
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Type of vehicle
Month, Day, and Hour of manufacture (MDH)
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read
the VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) is the
total allowable weight of your vehicle. This
includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The
total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) is the
maximum capacity of the front and rear axles.
Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either
front or rear GAWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label
represents the actual tire size on your vehicle.
Replacement tires must be equal to the load
capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire
size listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your
vehicle for all loading conditions up to full Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the
total weight of the vehicle with all fluids,
including vehicle fuel, at full capacity condi-
tions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded
into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle
on a commercial scale before any occupants or
cargo are added.
Overloading
The load carrying components (axle, springs,
tires, wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide
satisfactory service as long as you do not
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
and the front and rear Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR).
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it
is important that you do not exceed the
maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous
driving condition can result if either rating is
exceeded. You could lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 112
STARTING AND OPERATING 113
The best way to figure out the total weight of
your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded
and ready for operation. Weigh it on a commer-
cial scale to ensure that it is not over the GVWR.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear axle
of the vehicle separately. It is important that you
distribute the load evenly over the front and rear
axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards
and shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or
suspension components do not necessarily
increase the vehicle's GVWR.
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its
empty weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side.
Store heavier items down low and be sure you
distribute their weight as evenly as possible.
Stow all loose items securely before driving. If
weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR), but the total load is within the specified
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), you must
redistribute the weight. Improper weight distri-
bution can have an adverse effect on the way
your vehicle steers and handles and the way the
brakes operate.
NOTE:
Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed
to the rear of the driver's door for your vehicle's
GVWR and GAWRs.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and infor-
mation on limits to the type of towing you can
reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a
trailer, carefully review this information to tow
your load as efficiently and safely as possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
coverage, follow the requirements and recom-
mendations in this manual concerning vehicles
used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions
will assist you in understanding the following
information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) is the
total allowable weight of your vehicle. This
includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that
you do not exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle
Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
is the total allowable weight of your vehicle and
trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) is the weight of
the trailer plus the weight of all cargo, consum-
ables and equipment (permanent or temporary)
loaded in or on the trailer in its “loaded and
ready for operation” condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to
put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale.
The entire weight of the trailer must be
supported by the scale.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) is the
maximum capacity of the front and rear axles.
Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either
front or rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/
Vehicle Certification Label” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
5
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 113
114 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tongue Weight (TW)
The Tongue Weight (TW) is the downward force
exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer. You must
consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multi-
plied by the maximum width of the front of a
trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The Trailer Sway Control (TSC) can be a
mechanical telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the
trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable
friction associated with the telescoping motion
to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying
motions while traveling.
If equipped, the electronic TSC recognizes a
swaying trailer and automatically applies indi-
vidual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine
power to attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer
tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located
at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of
the vehicle. These kinds of hitches are the most
popular on the market today and they are
commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are
typically used for heavier loads to distribute
trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front
axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in accor-
dance with the manufacturer's directions, it
provides for a more level ride, offering more
consistent steering and brake control thereby
enhancing towing safety. The addition of a fric-
tion/hydraulic sway control also dampens sway
caused by traffic and crosswinds and contrib-
utes positively to tow vehicle and trailer
stability. Trailer sway control and a weight
distributing (load equalizing) hitch are recom-
mended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and
may be required depending on vehicle and
trailer configuration/loading to comply with
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry stan-
dard for the maximum trailer weight a given
trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to
assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch
for your intended towing condition.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the
maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous
driving condition can result if either rating is
exceeded. You could lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing
Hitch system may reduce handling,
stability, braking performance, and could
result in a collision.
Weight Distributing Systems may not be
compatible with Surge Brake Couplers.
Consult with your hitch and trailer manufac-
turer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle
dealer for additional information.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 114
STARTING AND OPERATING 115
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings)
NOTE:
For trailer towing information (maximum trailer
weight ratings) refer to the following website
addresses:
ramtrucks.com/en/towing_guide/
ramtruck.ca (Canada)
rambodybuilder.com
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight
stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.
Weight Distribution
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2,267 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
CAUTION!
Always load a trailer with 60% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% of the
GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads
balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely
side to side which will cause loss of control of
the vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers
heavier in front is the cause of many trailer
collisions.
5
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 115
116 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
(Continued)
Consider the following items when computing
the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
The tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or
equipment put in or on your vehicle.
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also,
additional factory-installed options or
dealer-installed options must be considered as
part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to
the “Tire And Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants
and cargo for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle
drivetrain components, the following guidelines
are recommended.
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Sched-
uled Servicing”. Refer to “Scheduled Servicing”
in “Servicing And Maintenance” for the proper
maintenance intervals. When towing a trailer,
never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
CAUTION!
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first
500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is
driven. The engine, axle or other parts could
be damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km)
that a trailer is towed, do not drive over
50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts
at full throttle. This helps the engine and
other parts of the vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
WARNING!
Make certain that the load is secured in the
trailer and will not shift during travel. When
trailering cargo that is not fully secured,
dynamic load shifts can occur that may be
difficult for the driver to control. You could lose
control of your vehicle and have a collision.
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do
not overload your vehicle or trailer. Over-
loading can cause a loss of control, poor
performance or damage to brakes, axle,
engine, transmission, steering, suspension,
chassis structure or tires.
CAUTION!
(Continued)
Safety chains must always be used
between your vehicle and trailer. Always
connect the chains to the hook retainers of
the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under
the trailer tongue and allow enough slack
for turning corners.
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked
on a grade. When parking, apply the
parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the
tow vehicle transmission in PARK. For
four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure the
transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always,
block or "chock" the trailer wheels.
GCWR must not be exceeded.
Total weight must be distributed between
the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the
following four ratings are not exceeded:
GVWR
GTW
GAWR
Tongue weight rating for the trailer
hitch utilized.
WARNING!
(Continued)
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 116
STARTING AND OPERATING 117
Towing Requirements — Tires
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a
compact spare tire.
Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h)
when towing while using a full size spare tire.
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential
to the safe and satisfactory operation of your
vehicle. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for proper tire inflation proce-
dures.
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire
damage before towing a trailer. Refer to
“Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for
the proper inspection procedure.
When replacing tires, refer to “Tires” in
“Servicing And Maintenance” for the proper
tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires
with a higher load carrying capacity will not
increase the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR
limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake
system or vacuum system of your vehicle
with that of the trailer. This could cause inad-
equate braking and possible personal injury.
An electronically actuated trailer brake
controller is required when towing a trailer
with electronically actuated brakes. When
towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic
surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers
over 1,000 lbs (453 kg) and may be required
for any trailer, for example trailers in excess
of 2,000 lbs (907 kg). Trailer brake require-
ments vary by local law, consult local legal
requirements where the trailer is to be towed
for trailer brake requirements.
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your
vehicle's hydraulic brake lines. It can over-
load your brake system and cause it to fail.
You might not have brakes when you need
them and could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stop-
ping distance. When towing, you should
allow for additional space between your
vehicle and the vehicle in front of you.
Failure to do so could result in an accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs
(453 kg) loaded, it should have its own
brakes and they should be of adequate
capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake
pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
5
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 117
118 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the
trailer size, stoplights and turn signals on the
trailer are required for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory
approved trailer harness and connector.
Trailer Electrical Connector Location
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to
the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a
trailer connector. Refer to the following illustra-
tions.
NOTE:
Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the
vehicle before launching a boat (or any other
device plugged into vehicle’s electrical
connect) into water.
Be sure to reconnect after clear from water
area.
Four-Pin Connector
Seven-Pin Connector
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning,
stopping, and backing up the trailer in an area
located away from heavy traffic.
1 — Four-Pin Connector Location
2 — Seven-Pin Connector Location
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
4 — Tail Lamp
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
1 — Battery
2 — Backup Lamps
3 — Right Stop/Turn
4 — Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Tail Lamp
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 118
STARTING AND OPERATING 119
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing.
The transmission controls include a drive
strategy to avoid frequent shifting when towing.
However, if frequent shifting does occur while in
DRIVE, select TOW/HAUL mode or select a lower
gear range (using the Electronic Range Select
(ERS) shift control).
NOTE:
Using TOW/HAUL mode or selecting a lower
gear range (using the ERS shift control) while
operating the vehicle under heavy loading
conditions will improve performance and
extend transmission life by reducing excessive
shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
When towing a loaded trailer up steep grades at
low speeds, holding your vehicle in first gear
(using the ERS shift control) can help to avoid
transmission overheating.
Tow/Haul Mode
To reduce potential for automatic transmission
overheating, activate TOW/HAUL mode when
driving in hilly areas, or select a lower gear
range (using the Electronic Range Select (ERS)
shift control) on more severe grades.
Speed Control — If Equipped
Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy
loads.
When using the speed control, if you experi-
ence speed drops greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), disengage until you can get back
to cruising speed.
Use speed control in flat terrain and with light
loads to maximize fuel efficiency.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission
overheating, take the following actions:
City Driving
In city traffic — while stopped, place the trans-
mission in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine
idle speed.
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
Temporarily turn off air conditioning.
5
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 119
120 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Recreational Towing
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front
wheels are OFF the ground. This may be accom-
plished using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If
using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle,
following the dolly manufacturer's instruc-
tions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place the
transmission in PARK.
4. Properly secure the front wheels to the
dolly, following the dolly manufacturer's
instructions.
5. Release the parking brake.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground Automatic Transmission
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow Front OK
Rear NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
CAUTION!
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result. If this vehicle requires
towing, make sure the drive wheels are OFF
the ground.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmis-
sion damage. Damage from improper
towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 120
STARTING AND OPERATING 121
DRIVING TIPS
Driving On Slippery Surfaces
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or
other slippery surfaces may cause the driving
wheels to pull erratically to the right or left. This
phenomenon occurs when there is a difference
in the surface traction under the front (driving)
wheels.
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is
possible for a wedge of water to build up
between the tire and road surface. This is hydro-
planing and may cause partial or complete loss
of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precau-
tions should be observed:
Slow down during rainstorms or when the
roads are slushy.
Slow down if the road has standing water or
puddles.
Replace the tires when tread wear indicators
first become visible.
Keep tires properly inflated.
Maintain sufficient distance between your
vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid
a collision in a sudden stop.
Driving Through Water
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to
ensure safety and prevent damage to your
vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is
dangerous. Unequal traction can cause
sudden pulling of the front wheels. You could
lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a
collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully
whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path
where water is flowing and/or rising (as in
storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away
the road or path's surface and cause your
vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can
carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to
follow this warning may result in injuries that
are serious or fatal to you, your passengers,
and others around you.
5
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 121
122 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving
through shallow standing water, consider the
following Cautions and Warnings before doing
so.
WARNING!
Driving through standing water limits your
vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not
exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water.
Driving through standing water limits your
vehicle’s braking capabilities, which
increases stopping distances. Therefore,
after driving through standing water, drive
slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal
several times to dry the brakes.
Failure to follow these warnings may result
in injuries that are serious or fatal to you,
your passengers, and others around you.
CAUTION!
Always check the depth of the standing
water before driving through it. Never drive
through standing water that is deeper than
the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the
vehicle.
Determine the condition of the road or the
path that is under water and if there are any
obstacles in the way before driving through
the standing water.
Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when
driving through standing water. This will
minimize wave effects.
Driving through standing water may cause
damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain compo-
nents. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids
(i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for
signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is
milky or foamy in appearance) after driving
through standing water. Do not continue to
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears
contaminated, as this may result in further
damage. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine
can cause it to lock up and stall out, and
cause serious internal damage to the
engine. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
(Continued)
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 122
123
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flashers switch is located
on the instrument panel below the climate
controls.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard
Warning flashers. When the switch is
activated, all directional turn signals
will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of
an emergency. Push the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it
should not be used when the vehicle is in
motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and
it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assis-
tance, the Hazard Warning flashers will
continue to operate even though the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use, the Hazard Warning
flashers may wear down your battery.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Dome Lamp C5W
Courtesy Lamp FF500
Cargo Lamp C5W
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Front Low and High Beam Headlamp H7SLL
Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps 7444NA
6
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 123
124 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Daytime Running Lamps (If Equipped) 7440
Front Side Marker Lamps W3W
Rear Tail/Stop Lamps 7443
Rear Turn Signal Lamps 7440NA
Rear Backup Lamps 921
Rear Side Marker Lamps W3W
Front Fog Lamps H11
License Plate Lamps C5W
Front Roof Lamps WY5W
Rear Roof Lamps W3W
NOTE:
Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from an authorized dealer. If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit an authorized dealer.
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 124
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 125
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
Headlamps Low Beam And High beam
1. Remove one retaining screw on the lower
headlamp filler panel. Remove filler panel.
2. Remove two retaining screws on the upper
headlamp filler panel. Remove filler panel.
3. Remove one upper retaining screw from the
headlamp housing.
4. Remove two lower retaining screws from
the headlamp housing.
5. Pull Headlamp forward, disconnect harness
electrical connector and remove the head-
lamp assembly from vehicle.
6. Remove appropriate plastic cap from the
back of the headlamp housing.
7. Push down on the upper portion of the
socket.
8. Pull the socket outward from reflector.
9. Pull bulb outward from socket.
10. Install new bulb.
11. Push socket back into reflector until it locks
back into place.
12. Install access cap.
13. Carefully reinstall headlamp in the same
position on the vehicle, so as not to affect
headlamp aiming.
14. Install one upper retaining screw on the
headlamp housing.
15. Install two lower retaining screws on the
headlamp housing.
16. Carefully reinstall the lower headlamp filler
panel and one retaining screw.
17. Carefully reinstall the upper headlamp filler
panel and two retaining screws.
Front Turn Signal/Parking Lamps
1. Remove one retaining screw on the lower
headlamp filler panel. Remove filler panel.
2. Remove two retaining screws on the upper
headlamp filler panel. Remove filler panel.
3. Remove one upper retaining screw from the
headlamp housing.
4. Remove two lower retaining screws from
the headlamp housing.
5. Pull Headlamp forward, disconnect the
harness electrical connector and remove
the headlamp assembly from vehicle.
6. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise and
remove.
7. Install the bulb into socket, and rotate bulb/
socket clockwise into lamp locking it in
place.
8. Carefully reinstall headlamp in the same
position on the vehicle, so as not to affect
headlamp aiming.
9. Install the one upper retaining screw on
headlamp housing.
10. Install the two lower retaining screws on
headlamp housing.
11. Carefully reinstall the lower headlamp filler
panel and one retaining screw.
12. Carefully reinstall the upper headlamp filler
panel and two retaining screws.
6
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 125
126 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Daytime Running Lamp (DRL)/Front Side Marker
Lamp
1. Remove one retaining screw on the lower
headlamp filler panel. Remove filler panel.
2. Remove two retaining screws on the upper
headlamp filler panel. Remove filler panel.
3. Remove one upper retaining screw from the
headlamp housing.
4. Remove two lower retaining screws from
the headlamp housing.
5. Pull Headlamp forward, disconnect the
harness electrical connector and remove
the headlamp assembly from vehicle.
6. Remove the Daytime Running Lamp (DRL),
side marker bulb by pulling straight out.
7. Replace lamp as required and lock in place.
8. Reinstall plastic cap.
9. Carefully reinstall headlamp in the same
position on the vehicle, as not to affect
headlamp aiming.
10. Install the one upper retaining screw on the
headlamp housing.
11. Install the two lower retaining screws on the
headlamp housing.
12. Carefully reinstall the lower headlamp filler
panel and one retaining screw.
13. Carefully reinstall the upper headlamp filler
panel and two retaining screws.
Front Fog Lamps
1. Turn front wheels inboard to access cover in
wheel liner.
2. Open the cover on the front of the wheel
liner.
3. Remove connection and replace the bulb.
4. Connect the wire and rotate bulb/socket
clockwise into lamp locking it in place.
5. Reinstall the plastic cap and close the cover
on the wheel liner.
Front, Rear Roof Lamps
1. Remove two screw and remove the lamp
assembly.
2. Remove the socket bulb by turning counter-
clockwise.
3. Remove bulb and replace as needed.
4. Reinstall the bulb socket and rotate clock-
wise to lock in place.
5. Reinstall lamp.
Rear Tail, Stop, Backup, Turn Signal And Rear Side
Marker Lamps
1. Open rear doors.
2. Remove the seven (7) fasteners from the
rear access cover and remove cover to gain
access to the Tail lamp assembly fasteners.
Rear Access Cover
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 126
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 127
3. Remove the two (2) 17mm tail light
assembly fasteners.
4. Disconnect the tail light harness connector
and remove tail light assembly from the
vehicle.
5. Remove the tail/stop, turn signal, backup
and rear side marker bulb/socket by
rotating counterclockwise.
6. Remove the bulb and replace as needed.
7. Reinstall bulb/socket and rotate clockwise
to lock in place.
8. Reinstall lamp.
Replacing Interior Bulbs
Cargo Lamp
1. Using a suitable tool, remove either the
lamp above the back door or the sliding
door lamp as needed and disconnect it.
Rear Cargo Lamp Bulb Access
2. Using a suitable tool, pull open the metal
bulb access on the back of the housing.
Cargo Lamp Bulb Location
3. Remove and install the replacement bulb.
4. Close the bulb access, connect the lamp
and install the lamp into place.
Dome Lamps
1. Using a suitable tool, insert the tip at the
location shown and press inward to the
lamp to relieve the spring tension. This will
allow you to easily drop the dome lamp
assembly from its bracket and disconnect
the lamp.
Dome Lamp Assembly Location
1 — Spring Tension Relief Access
2 — Dome Lamp Assembly
6
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 127
128 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
2. Using a suitable tool, flex the housing to lift
the light pod cover away from the unit.
Dome Lamp Light Pod Cover
3. Remove and replace the bulbs as needed.
Dome Lamp Light Bulbs
4. Close the housing cover making sure it
snaps together properly and connect the
lamp.
5. Install overhead console into place making
sure to seat the assembly’s forward end
first and then snapping it flush so that the
tension spring is fully seating in the housing.
FUSES
Underhood Fuses
The Front Power Distribution Center is located
on the driver’s side of the engine compartment.
To access the fuses, remove the cover.
Front Power Distribution Center
The ID number of the electrical component
corresponding to each fuse can be found on the
back of the cover.
WARNING!
When replacing a blown fuse, always use
an appropriate replacement fuse with the
same amp rating as the original fuse. Never
replace a fuse with another fuse of higher
amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with
metal wires or any other material. Do not
place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity
or vice versa. Failure to use proper fuses
may result in serious personal injury, fire
and/or property damage.
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
ignition is off and that all the other services
are switched off and/or disengaged.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
authorized dealer.
If a general protection fuse for safety
systems (air bag system, braking system),
power unit systems (engine system, trans-
mission system) or steering system blows,
contact an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
(Continued)
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 128
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 129
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F01 40 Amp Orange – Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Pump
F02 20 Amp Yellow (3.6 Gasoline
Engine)
– Starter Relay 3.6L (3.6 Gasoline Engine)
F04 50 Amp Red (3.6 Gasoline
Engine)
– Secondary Power Distribution Center (PDC) (Trans
Power Relay, Vacuum Pump, KL30 for the Shifter
Transmission Module [STM]) (3.6 Gasoline Engine)
F06 40 Amp Orange (non A/C)
60 Amp Blue (A/C)
– Engine Cooling Fan - 2nd Speed
F07 50 Amp Red (non A/C)
60 Amp Blue (A/C)
– Engine Cooling Fan - 1st Speed
F08 40 Amp Orange – Passenger Compartment Blower
F09 – 15 Amp Blue Rear Power Outlet
F10 – 15 Amp Blue Horn
F14 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet
F15 – 7.5 Amp Brown USB Charger
F16 – 7.5 Amp Brown KL15 Shifter Transmission Module (STM) (3.6), KL15
Starter Relay Coil (3.6 Gasoline Engine)
F17 – 20 Amp Yellow Engine Control Module (ECM), Injectors (3.6 Gasoline
Engine)
F18 – 7.5 Amp Brown KL30 Engine Control Module (ECM), KL30 Main Relay
Coil (3.6 Gasoline Engine)
F19 – 7.5 Amp Brown A/C Compressor — If Equipped
6
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 129
130 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Front PDC Additional Fuses
The additional fuse box is located inside the
front PDC Box.
Front Power Distribution Center Additional Fuses
F20 – 30 Amp Green Windshield Wiper
F21 – 15 Amp Blue Fuel Pump
F22 – 20 Amp Yellow Engine Control Module (ECM), Ignition Coils (3.6
Gasoline Engine)
F23 – 20 Amp Yellow Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Valves
F24 – 7.5 Amp Brown KL15 Vacuum Pump Relay Coil (3.6 Gasoline Engine) —
If Equipped
F30 – 15 Amp Blue Heated Mirrors
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
F61 20 Amp Yellow Vacuum Pump (3.6 Gasoline Engine)
F62 30 Amp Green Transmission Power RELE (3.6 Gasoline Engine)
F66 5 Amp Beige Shifter Transmission Module (STM) (3.6 Gasoline Engine)
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 130
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 131
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is part of the Body
Control Module (BCM) and is located on the
driver's side under the instrument panel.
Fuse Panel Fuse Panel Cavity Locations
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
F31 5 Amp Beige INT/A
F34 7.5 Amp Brown Clearance Lights
F36 15 Amp Blue +30 (ACM – TPCU – RRM – DLC)
F37 5 Amp Beige INT (BRAKE NO – IPC)
F38 15 Amp Blue Central Locking
F42 5 Amp Beige INT (BSM – SAS – BRAKE NC)
F43 20 Amp Yellow Bi-Directional Washer Pump
F47 20 Amp Yellow Driver Power Window
F48 20 Amp Yellow Passenger Power Window
F49 5 Amp Beige INT (PAM – CCS – RRM – ECM)
F50 7.5 Amp Brown INT (ORC)
F51 5 Amp Beige INT (REAR CAMERA-AUX)
6
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 131
132 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Right Central Pillar Fuses
The right central pillar fuse panel is located on
the interior side at the base of the passenger
side B pillar.
Fuse Panel Location
Fuse Panel
F53 5 Amp Beige +30 (IPC) + FTM
F92 7.5 Amp Brown Left Fog Lamp
F93 7.5 Amp Brown Right Fog Lamp
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
F81 7.5 Amp Brown Seat Heater
F83
20 Amp Yellow Rear Left Windows Heater
F84 20 Amp Yellow Rear Right Windows Heater
F86 20 Amp Yellow Auxiliary Switch (From Battery) — If Equipped
F87 20 Amp Yellow Auxiliary Switch (From Ignition) — If Equipped
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 132
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 133
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
Jack Location
The jack and jack tools are stored under the
front passenger seat in a box, or next to or
behind the driver seat in a tool bag. The box and
the tool bag contain the same items.
Jack Kit Location
To release the jack kit for it’s storage location,
turn the lock knob a quarter turn counterclock-
wise to the unlock position.
Lock Knob
To open the jack kit container, you must push
the container’s release to separate the top and
bottom.
Container Release
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side
of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull
far enough off the road to avoid the danger
of being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is
dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the
jack and fall on you. You could be crushed.
Never put any part of your body under a
vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service
center where it can be raised on a lift.
Never start or run the engine while the
vehicle is on a jack.
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be
used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.
The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level
surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
CAUTION!
Do not force lock knob over limit. Damage to
lock knob may occur.
1 — Unlock Position
2 — Lock Position
6
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 133
134 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Jacking Tools
Spare Tire Removal
1. Remove the spare tire before attempting to
jack up the vehicle. Attach the lug bolt
adapter to the winch extension and insert it
into the winch mechanism.
Jack Tools
Winch Location
The winch mechanism is located under the
rear of the vehicle to the right of the spare
tire.
Winch Extension
2. Rotate the wheel wrench handle counter-
clockwise until the spare tire is on the
ground with enough cable slack to allow you
to pull it out from under the vehicle.
1 — Tow Eye
2 — Wrench Handle
3 — Lug Bolt Adaptor
4 — Jack
5 — Reversible Tool
6 — Tool Handle
7 — Winch Extension
1 — Wrench Handle
2 — Lug Bolt Adapter
3 — Winch Extension
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 134
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 135
NOTE:
The winch mechanism is designed for use with
the winch extension tube only. Use of an air
wrench or other power tools is not recom-
mended and can damage the winch.
Lowering Spare Tire
3. Pull the spare tire out from under the
vehicle to gain access to the spare tire
retainer.
Spare Tire
4. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give
clearance to tilt the retainer at the end of
the cable.
Lifting Spare Tire
5. Pull the retainer through the center of the
wheel.
Retainer
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake firmly.
4. Place the transmission in PARK (P) or
REVERSE (R) for manual transmission.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
6
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 135
136 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite the jacking position. For
example, if the right front wheel is being
changed, block the left rear wheel.
Wheel Blocked
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being lifted or raised.
Jacking Instructions
Jack Warning Label
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings
to help prevent personal injury or damage to
your vehicle:
Always park on a firm, level surface as far
from the edge of the roadway as possible
before raising the vehicle.
Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the
wheel to be raised.
Apply the parking brake firmly and place an
automatic transmission in PARK; a manual
transmission in REVERSE.
Never start or run the engine with the
vehicle on a jack.
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it
is on a jack.
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
jack. If you need to get under a raised
vehicle, take it to a service center where it
can be raised on a lift.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated
and for lifting this vehicle during a tire
change.
If working on or near a roadway, be
extremely careful of motor traffic.
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated,
are securely stowed, spares must be
stowed with the valve stem facing the
ground.
WARNING!
(Continued)
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 136
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 137
Assembled Jack
1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug
bolts by turning them counterclockwise one
turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
2. There are two jack engagement locations
on each side of the vehicle body.
Jacking Engagement Locations
NOTE:
The rear jacking location is located in front of
the rear tire and in front of the leaf spring
mount.
Front Lifting Point
Front Jacking Location
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking
on locations other than those indicated in the
Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking
on locations other than those indicated.
6
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 137
138 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Rear Lifting Point
Rear Jacking Location
NOTE:
The front jacking location is located behind the
front tire and in front of the driver/passenger
door.
3. Place the wrench handle and lug bolt
adapter on the jack screw and turn clock-
wise until the jack head is properly engaged
in the described location. Do not raise the
vehicle until you are sure the jack is
securely engaged.
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw
clockwise, using the wrench handle and lug
bolt adapter. Raise the vehicle only until the
tire just clears the surface and enough
clearance is obtained to install the spare
tire. Minimum tire lift provides maximum
stability.
5. Remove the wheel lug bolts. For vehicles
with wheel covers, remove the cover from
the wheel by hand. Do not pry the wheel
cover off. Then pull the wheel off the hub.
6. Install the spare tire. Lightly tighten the
wheel lug bolts.
Mounting Spare Tire
WARNING!
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is
dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the jack
and fall on you. You could be crushed. Never
get any part of your body under a vehicle that
is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised
vehicle, take it to a service center where it
can be raised on a lift.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off
the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the
vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 138
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 139
NOTE:
Do not install the wheel cover on the spare tire.
7. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw
counterclockwise.
8. Refer to “Wheel And Tire Torque Specifica-
tions” in “Technical Specifications” for
proper wheel lug bolt torque.
9. Lower the jack to its fully-closed position.
10. Stow the damaged wheel/spare tire with
the cable and wheel spacer before driving
the vehicle.
11. Install the winch extension and rotate the
wrench handle clockwise until the winch
mechanism operator hears “3 clicks” from
the device to indicate the wheel is properly
stowed under the vehicle.
12. Stow the jack, jack handle and winch handle
tools back in the storage compartment.
13. Check the spare tire pressure as soon as
possible. Correct the tire pressure, as
required.
For vehicles with aluminum wheels:
The center cap must be pushed out from the
rear to install the retainer and stow the tire.
Wheel Covers
The wheel covers on the vehicle are held in
place by the wheel lug bolts and can be
removed after the wheel lug bolts are taken off.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the
tire tread can be sealed with Tire Service Kit.
Foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) should not
be removed from the tire. Tire Service Kit can be
used in outside temperatures down to approxi-
mately -4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal,
allowing you to drive your vehicle up to
100 miles (160 km) with a maximum speed of
50 mph (80 km/h).
Tire Service Kit Storage
The Tire Service Kit is located under the
passenger seat or the driver side door.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious
injury.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve
stem facing outward. The vehicle could be
damaged if the spare tire is mounted
incorrectly.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack
parts and the spare tire in the places
provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired
or replaced immediately.
CAUTION!
Use a back-and-forth motion to remove the
hub cap. Do not use a twisting motion when
removing the hub cap, damage to the hub
cap finish may occur.
6
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 139
140 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation
Tire Service Kit Components
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the
following symbols to indicate the air or sealant
mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (2)
and turn to this position for air
pump operation only. Use the Black
Air Pump Hose (5) when selecting
this mode.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (2)
and turn to this position to inject
the Tire Service Kit Sealant and to
inflate the tire. Use the Sealant
Hose (3) when selecting this mode.
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button
(1) once to turn on the Tire Service
Kit. Push and release the Power
Button (1) again to turn Off the Tire
Service Kit.
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button (9) to
reduce the air pressure in the tire if
it becomes over-inflated.
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle
(4) and Sealant Hose (3) prior to the expira-
tion date (printed at the upper right hand
corner on the bottle label) to assure optimum
operation of the system. Refer to “Sealing A
Tire With Tire Service Kit” section (F) “Sealant
Bottle And Hose Replacement in this section
for further information”.
Tire Service Kit Sealant Expiration Date Location
1 — Power Button
2 — Mode Select Knob
3 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
4 — Sealant Bottle
5 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
6 — Sealant Bottle Release Button
7 — Power Plug
8 — Pressure Gauge
9 — Deflation Button
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 140
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 141
(Continued)
The Sealant Bottle (4) and Sealant Hose (3)
are a one tire application use and need to be
replaced after each use. Always replace
these components immediately at your orig-
inal equipment vehicle dealer.
When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid
form, clean water and a damp cloth will
remove the material from the vehicle or tire
and wheel components. Once the sealant
dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly
discarded.
For optimum performance, make sure the
valve stem on the wheel is free of debris
before connecting the Tire Service Kit.
You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to
inflate bicycle tires. The kit also comes with
two needles, located in the Accessory Storage
Compartment (on the bottom of the air pump)
for inflating sport balls, rafts, or similar inflat-
able items. However, use only the Air Pump
Hose (5) and make sure the Mode Select
Knob (2) is in the Air Mode when inflating such
items to avoid injecting sealant into them. The
Tire Service Kit Sealant is only intended to
seal punctures less than 1/4 inch (6 mm)
diameter in the tread of your tire.
Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the
hoses.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of
the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough
off the road to avoid the danger of being hit
when using the Tire Service Kit.
Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the
vehicle under the following circumstances:
If the puncture in the tire tread is
approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or
larger.
If the tire has any sidewall damage.
If the tire has any damage from driving
with extremely low tire pressure.
If the tire has any damage from driving
on a flat tire.
If the wheel has any damage.
If you are unsure of the condition of the
tire or the wheel.
Keep Tire Service Kit away from open
flames or heat source.
A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the
Tire Service Kit in the place provided.
Failure to follow these warnings can result
in injuries that are serious or fatal to you,
your passengers, and others around you.
Take care not to allow the contents of Tire
Service Kit to come in contact with hair,
eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is
harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed
through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and
respiratory irritation. Flush immediately
with plenty of water if there is any contact
with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon
as possible, if there is any contact with
clothing.
Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains
latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash,
consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire
Service Kit out of reach of children. If swal-
lowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty
of water and drink plenty of water. Do not
induce vomiting! Consult a physician imme-
diately.
WARNING!
(Continued)
6
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 141
142 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the
vehicle’s Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with
the deflated tire) is in a position that is near
to the ground. This will allow the Tire Service
Kit Hoses (3) and (5) to reach the valve
stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat on
the ground. This will provide the best posi-
tioning of the kit when injecting the sealant
into the deflated tire and running the air
pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to
place the valve stem in this position before
proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (P) (auto
transmission) or in Gear (manual transmis-
sion) and place the ignition in the OFF posi-
tion.
4. Apply the parking brake.
(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (2) and turn
to the Sealant Mode position.
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (3) and then
remove the cap from the fitting at the end of
the hose.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground
next to the deflated tire.
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and
then screw the fitting at the end of the
Sealant Hose (3) onto the valve stem.
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (7) and insert the plug
into the vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE:
Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) from the tire.
(C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The
Deflated Tire:
Always start the engine before turning ON the
Tire Service Kit.
NOTE:
Manual transmission vehicles must have the
parking brake engaged and the gear selector in
NEUTRAL.
After pushing the Power Button (1), the
sealant (white fluid) will flow from the Sealant
Bottle (4) through the Sealant Hose (3) and
into the tire.
NOTE:
Sealant may leak out through the puncture in
the tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0
– 10 seconds through the Sealant Hose (3):
1. Push the Power Button (1) to turn Off the
Tire Service Kit. Disconnect the Sealant
Hose (3) from the valve stem. Make sure
the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect
the Sealant Hose (3) to the valve stem.
Check that the Mode Select Knob (2) is in
the Sealant Mode position and not Air
Mode. Push the Power Button (1) to turn On
the Tire Service Kit.
2. Connect the Power Plug (7) to a different 12
Volt power outlet in your vehicle or another
vehicle, if available. Make sure the engine is
running before turning ON the Tire Service
Kit.
3. The Sealant Bottle (4) may be empty due to
previous use. Call for assistance.
NOTE:
If the Mode Select Knob (2) is on Air Mode and
the pump is operating, air will dispense from the
Air Pump Hose (5) only, not the Sealant Hose
(3).
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 142
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 143
(Continued)
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
Sealant Hose (3):
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant
is no longer flowing through the hose (typi-
cally takes 30 - 70 seconds). As the sealant
flows through the Sealant Hose (3), the
Pressure Gauge (8) can read as high as 70
psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge (8) will
decrease quickly from approximately 70 psi
(4.8 Bar) to the actual tire pressure when
the Sealant Bottle (4) is empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire
immediately after the Sealant Bottle (4) is
empty. Continue to operate the pump and
inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on
the tire pressure label on the driver-side
latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check
the tire pressure by looking at the Pressure
Gauge (8).
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8
Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt
to drive the vehicle further. Call for assis-
tance.
NOTE:
If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Defla-
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the
recommended inflation pressure before
continuing.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure
or is at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within
15 minutes:
1. Push the Power Button (1) to turn off the
Tire Service Kit.
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the
top of the Sealant Bottle (4) and place the
sticker on the instrument panel.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose
(3) from the valve stem, reinstall the cap on
the fitting at the end of the hose, and place
the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle storage
location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive
Vehicle.”
(D) Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating
the tire, drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or ten
minutes to ensure distribution of the Tire
Service Kit Sealant within the tire. Do not
exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
CAUTION!
The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8)
may get hot after use, so it should be
handled carefully.
Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at
the end of the Sealant Hose (6) can result
in sealant contacting your skin, clothing,
and the vehicle’s interior. It can also result
in sealant contacting internal Tire Service
Kit components which may cause perma-
nent damage to the kit.
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire
repair. Have the tire inspected and repaired
or replaced after using Tire Service Kit. Do
not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) until the tire is
repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this
warning can result in injuries that are serious
or fatal to you, your passengers, and others
around you.
CAUTION!
(Continued)
6
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 143
144 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(E) After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “(A) When-
ever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit” before
continuing.
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (2) and turn
to the Air Mode position.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug
into the vehicle's 12 Volt power outlet.
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (5) (black in color)
and screw the fitting at the end of hose onto
the valve stem.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the
Pressure Gauge (8).
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to
drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button (1) to turn on Tire
Service Kit and inflate the tire to the pres-
sure indicated on the tire and loading infor-
mation label on the driver-side door
opening.
NOTE:
If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the
Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to
the recommended inflation pressure before
continuing.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the valve
stem and unplug from 12 Volt outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper
storage area in the vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or
replaced at the earliest opportunity at an
authorized dealer or tire service center.
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the
instrument panel after the tire has been
repaired.
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (4) and Sealant
Hose (3) assembly at an authorized dealer
as soon as possible. Refer to “(F) Sealant
Bottle And Hose Replacement”.
NOTE:
When having the tire serviced, advise the autho-
rized dealer or service center that the tire has
been sealed using the Tire Service Kit.
(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (3) (clear in color).
2. Locate the red colored round Sealant Bottle
release button at the lower right hand
corner of the kit.
3. Push and hold the Sealant Bottle release
button, then pull out the bottle holding the
button.
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire
Service Kit housing.
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (4) in the
housing so that the Sealant Hose (3) aligns
with the hose slot in the front of the
housing. Push and hold the Sealant Bottle
release button, then push the bottle into the
housing by holding the button. An audible
click will be heard indicating the bottle is
locked into place. Release the button.
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting
at the end of the Sealant Hose (3) and
return the hose to its storage area (located
on top of the housing).
7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage
location in the vehicle.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 144
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 145
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can
be jump started using a set of jumper cables
and a battery in another vehicle or by using a
portable battery booster pack. Jump starting
can be dangerous if done improperly, so please
follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack,
follow the manufacturer’s operating instruc-
tions and precautions.
Preparations For Jump Start
The vehicle’s jump starting remote posts are
located under the hood, in the engine compart-
ment on the driver's side.
The Remote Positive (+) Post is covered with a
protective cap located on the side of the Front
Power Distribution Center.
The Remote Negative (-) Post is located on the
core support closest to the front of the vehicle.
Jump Starting Locations
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic
transmission into PARK (P) and turn the
ignition to the OFF position.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unneces-
sary electrical accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the
battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
cables reach, apply the parking brake and
make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or
any other booster source with a system
voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to
the battery, starter motor, alternator or
electrical system may occur.
(+) — Remote Positive Post
(-) — Remote Negative Post
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can
be injured by moving fan blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could
make an inadvertent electrical contact. You
could be seriously injured.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can
burn your skin or eyes and generate
hydrogen gas which is flammable and
explosive. Keep open flames or sparks
away from the battery.
6
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 145
146 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Jump Starting Procedure
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper
cable to the remote positive (+) post of the
discharged vehicle.
NOTE:
The remote positive (+) post is located in the
engine compartment on the driver's side under
the cover of the Front Power Distribution
Center.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the
booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper
cable to the negative (-) post of the booster
battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable to the remote negative (-) post
of the discharged vehicle.
NOTE:
The remote negative (-) post is located in the
front of the engine compartment on the driver's
side.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the
booster battery. Let the engine idle a few
minutes and then start the engine in the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, disconnect the
jumper cables in the reverse sequence.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the
jumper cable from the remote negative (-)
post of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative
(-) jumper cable from the negative (-) post of
the booster battery.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as
this could establish a ground connection and
personal injury could result.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure
could result in personal injury or property
damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could
result in damage to the charging system of
the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the discharged battery.
The resulting electrical spark could cause the
battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific ground
point, do not use any other exposed metal
parts.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 146
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 147
3. Disconnect the positive end (+) of the
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of
the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive
(+) jumper cable from the remote positive
(+) post of the discharged vehicle.
5. Close the cover of the Front Power Distribu-
tion Center.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your
vehicle you should have the battery and
charging system inspected at an authorized
dealer.
Battery Location
There are two remote jump starting posts under
the hood which is the recommended jump start
location. If access to the battery is needed, an
access panel on the driver’s side floor will allow
for battery access.
Access Panel
Battery Location
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can
reduce the potential for overheating by taking
the appropriate action.
On the highways — slow down.
In city traffic — while stopped, place the trans-
mission in NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase
the engine idle speed while preventing
vehicle motion with the brakes.
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off.
The A/C system adds heat to the engine
cooling system and turning the A/C off can
help remove this heat.
You can also turn the temperature control to
maximum heat, the mode control to floor and
the blower control to high. This allows the
heater core to act as a supplement to the
radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power
outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices,
etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough
without engine operation, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade
battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
6
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 147
148 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector
cannot be moved out of the PARK (P) position,
you can use the following procedure to tempo-
rarily move the gear selector:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool,
remove the gear selector override access
cover which is located below the gear
selector.
Gear Selector Release Cover
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the
brake pedal.
5. Insert the screwdriver or similar tool into the
access port, and push and hold the override
release lever forward.
Release Lever
6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL (N)
position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in
NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the gear selector override access
cover.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming
from under the hood, do not open the hood
until the radiator has had time to cool. Never
try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature
gauge reads HOT (H), pull over and stop the
vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on HOT (H), and you hear continuous
chimes, turn the engine off immediately and
call for service.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 148
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 149
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or
snow, it can often be moved using a rocking
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
clear the area around the front wheels. Shift
back and forth between DRIVE (D) and
REVERSE (R), while gently pressing the acceler-
ator. Use the least amount of accelerator pedal
pressure that will maintain the rocking motion,
without spinning the wheels or racing the
engine.
NOTE:
Push the “ESC OFF” switch, to place the Elec-
tronic Stability Control (ESC) system in “Partial
OFF” mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to
“Electronic Brake Control System” in “Safety”
for further information. Once the vehicle has
been freed, push the “ESC OFF” switch again to
restore “ESC ON” mode.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a
disabled vehicle using a commercial towing
service.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may
lead to transmission overheating and failure.
Allow the engine to idle with the transmission
in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after
every five rocking-motion cycles. This will
minimize overheating and reduce the risk of
transmission failure during prolonged efforts
to free a stuck vehicle.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause damage, or even failure, of the axle
and tires. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer
than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping when you are stuck and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter
what the speed.
CAUTION!
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin
the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h),
or drivetrain damage may result.
Spinning the wheels too fast may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. It can
also damage the tires. Do not spin the
wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in
gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
6
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 149
150 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to
prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow
bars and other equipment designed for this
purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s
instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory.
Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main
structural members of the vehicle, not to
bumpers or associated brackets. State and
local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be
observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers,
defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition
must be in the ON/RUN mode.
If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle's
battery is discharged, refer to “Gear Selector
Override” in this section for instructions on
shifting the automatic transmission out of PARK
(P) for towing.
Automatic Transmission
The manufacturer recommends towing your
vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground
using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the
transmission is operable, this vehicle may be
towed (with front wheels on the ground) under
the following conditions:
The transmission must be in NEUTRAL (N).
The towing speed must not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The towing distance must not exceed
15 miles (24 km).
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground ALL Models
Flat Tow NONE If transmission is operable:
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 25 mph (40 km/h) max speed
• 15 miles (24 km) max distance
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow Rear
Front OK
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD
CAUTION!
Do not use sling type equipment when
towing. Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flat bed
truck, do not attach to front or rear suspen-
sion components. Damage to your vehicle
may result from improper towing.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 150
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 151
If the transmission is not operable, or the
vehicle must be towed faster than 25 mph
(40 km/h) or farther than 15 miles (24 km), tow
with the front wheels OFF the ground (using a
flatbed truck, or wheel lift equipment with the
front wheels raised).
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Acci-
dent Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” under the paragraph “Fuel Cut Off
Switch” for further information on the Enhanced
Accident Response System (EARS) function.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record data that will assist in understanding
how a vehicle’s systems performed under
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such
as an air bag deployment or hitting a road
obstacle.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information on the Event
Data Recorder (EDR).
CAUTION!
Towing faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or
farther than 15 miles (24 km) with front
wheels on the ground can cause severe
transmission damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmis-
sion damage. Damage from improper
towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
6
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 151
152
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil
change indicator system. The oil change indi-
cator system will remind you that it is time to
take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate in the
instrument cluster. This means that service is
required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, and
extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures will
influence when the “Oil Change Required”
message is displayed. Severe Operating Condi-
tions can cause the change oil message to illu-
minate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km)
since last reset. Have the vehicle serviced as
soon as possible, within the next 500 miles
(805 km).
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the sched-
uled oil change. If a scheduled oil change is
performed by someone other than an autho-
rized dealer, the message can be reset by refer-
ring to the steps described under “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
12 months or 350 hours of engine run time,
whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
run or idle time is generally only a concern for
fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or
350 hours of engine run time if the vehicle is
operated in a dusty and off road environment or
is operated predominately at idle or only very
low engine RPM. This type of vehicle use is
considered Severe Duty.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check engine oil level
Check windshield washer fluid level
Check the tire inflation pressures and look
for unusual wear or damage. Rotate at the
first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs
before the oil indicator system turns on
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
brake master cylinder, and power steering
and fill as needed
Check function of all interior and exterior
lights
Maintenance Plan
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the maintenance plan on the following
pages for the required maintenance intervals.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 152
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 153
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter.
Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions.
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod
ends, boot seals, and replace if
necessary.
X X X X X X X
7
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 153
154 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Inspect the brake pads, replace as
necessary.
X X X X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace the engine air filter. X X X X X
Inspect the cabin air filter, replace
as necessary.
X X X X X X X
Replace the Brake Fluid every two
years.
1
X X X X X X X
Replace the spark plugs.
2
X
Flush and replace the engine
coolant at 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km)
whichever comes first.
X X
Change the automatic
transmission fluid and filter.
X X
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 154
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 155
(Continued)
Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle
Change engine oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or
350 hours of engine run time if the vehicle is
operated in a dusty or off road environment, or
is operated predominately at idle or only very
low engine RPM. This type of vehicle use is
considered Severe Duty.
Inspect and replace the PCV valve
if necessary.
X
1. The brake fluid change interval is time based only, mileage intervals do not apply.
2. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Do only service
work for which you have the knowledge and
the right equipment. If you have any doubt
about your ability to perform a service job,
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain
your vehicle could result in a component
malfunction and effect vehicle handling
and performance. This could cause an acci-
dent.
WARNING!
(Continued)
7
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 155
156 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.6L Engine
1 — Washer Fluid Reservoir 5 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
2 — Engine Oil Fill 6 — Coolant Reservoir
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 7 — Power Steering Reservoir
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 156
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 157
Checking Oil Level — Gas Engine
To ensure proper lubrication of your vehicle's
engine, the engine oil must be maintained at
the correct level. Check the oil level at regular
intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time
to check the engine oil level is about five
minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut
off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level
ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level
readings. Always maintain the oil level within
the SAFE zone on the dipstick. Adding one quart
of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the
SAFE zone will result in a reading at the top of
the safe zone on these engines.
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir is located in the engine
compartment and should be checked at regular
intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield
washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and
operate the system for a few seconds to flush
out any residual water.
The washer fluid reservoir will hold a full gallon
of fluid when the Low Washer Fluid Light illumi-
nates.
After the engine has warmed, operate the
defroster for a few minutes to reduce the possi-
bility of smearing or freezing the fluid on the
cold windshield. Mopar All Weather Windshield
Washer Solution or equivalent, used with water
as directed on the container, aids cleaning
action, reduces the freezing point to avoid line
clogging, and is not harmful to paint or trim.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a mainte-
nance-free battery. You will never have to add
water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could
damage your engine.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer
solvents are flammable. They could ignite and
burn you. Care must be exercised when filling
or working around the washer solution.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and
can burn or even blind you. Do not allow
battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or
clothing. Do not lean over a battery when
attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes
or on skin, flush the area immediately with
large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump
Starting Procedure” in “In Case Of Emer-
gency” for further information.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive.
Keep flame or sparks away from the
battery. Do not use a booster battery or any
other booster source with an output greater
than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related acces-
sories contain lead and lead compounds.
Wash hands after handling.
7
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 157
158 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Pressure Washing
DEALER SERVICE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service
personnel, special tools, and equipment to
perform all service operations in an expert
manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your
vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could
result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
Engine Oil
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you
that it is time to take your vehicle in for sched-
uled maintenance. Refer to the “Maintenance
Plan” for further information.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
12 months or 350 hours of engine run time,
whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
run or idle time is generally only a concern for
fleet customers.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection
under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer only recommends engine oils
that are API Certified and meet the require-
ments of FCA Material Standard MS-6395.
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on
the battery that the positive cable is
attached to the positive post and the nega-
tive cable is attached to the negative post.
Battery posts are marked positive (+) and
negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery
is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle
battery cables before connecting the
charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast
charger” to provide starting voltage.
CAUTION!
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high
pressure washer is not recommended.
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all
parts and connections however, the
pressures generated by these machines is
such that complete protection against water
ingress cannot be guaranteed.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Only do service work
for which you have the knowledge and the
proper equipment. If you have any doubt
about your ability to perform a service job,
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 158
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 159
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American Petro-
leum Institute (API). The manufac-
turer only recommends API Certified
engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30,
5W-30 and 10W-30 engine oils.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 3.6L Engine
Mopar SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil,
Shell Helix Ultra or equivalent is recommended
for all operating temperatures. This engine oil
improves low temperature starting and vehicle
fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recom-
mended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For
information on engine oil filler cap location,
refer to the “Engine Compartment” illustration
in this section.
NOTE:
Mopar SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to FCA
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil,
Shell Helix Ultra or equivalent may be used
when SAE 5W-20 engine oil meeting MS-6395
is not available.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine
oil certification mark and the correct SAE
viscosity grade number should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the
recommended oil quality requirements are met,
and the recommended maintenance intervals
for oil and filter changes are followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the
engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE
viscosity grade number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends
against the addition of any additives (other than
leak detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil
is an engineered product and its performance
may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used
engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used
oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can
present a problem to the environment. Contact
an authorized dealer, service station or govern-
mental agency for advice on how and where
used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a
new filter at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer's engines have a full-flow
type disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type
for replacement. The quality of replacement
filters varies considerably. Only high quality
filters should be used to ensure most efficient
service. Mopar engine oil filters are high quality
oil filters and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section
for the proper maintenance intervals.
NOTE:
Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions”
maintenance interval if applicable.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil
as the chemicals can damage your engine.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
7
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 159
160 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner
filters varies considerably. Only high quality
filters should be used to ensure most efficient
service. Mopar engine air cleaner filters are a
high quality filter and are recommended.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air condi-
tioner should be checked and serviced by an
authorized dealer at the start of each warm
season. This service should include cleaning of
the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at
this time.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydro-
fluorocarbon (HFC) that is an ozone-saving
product. However, the manufacturer recom-
mends that air conditioning service be
performed by authorized dealer or other service
facilities using recovery and recycling equip-
ment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
Cabin Air Filter (A/C Air Filter)
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) can provide a measure of protection in
the case of engine backfire. Do not remove
the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) unless such removal is necessary for
repair or maintenance. Make sure that no
one is near the engine compartment before
starting the vehicle with the air induction
system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed.
Failure to do so can result in serious personal
injury.
WARNING!
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri-
cants approved by the manufacturer for
your air conditioning system. Some unap-
proved refrigerants are flammable and can
explode, injuring you. Other unapproved
refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs.
Refer to Warranty Information Book, for
further warranty information.
The air conditioning system contains refrig-
erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of
personal injury or damage to the system,
adding refrigerant or any repair requiring
lines to be disconnected should be done by
an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air
conditioning system as the chemicals can
damage your air conditioning components.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the
vehicle is running, or while the ignition is in
the ACC or ON/RUN mode. With the cabin air
filter removed and the blower operating, the
blower can contact hands and may propel dirt
and debris into your eyes, resulting in
personal injury.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 160
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 161
The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet
in the engine compartment. Perform the
following procedure to replace the filter:
1. Remove the two screws that secure the
filter retainer to the fresh air inlet, and
remove the filter retainer.
Accessing Air Filter
2. Remove and replace the cabin air filter from
the filter retainer.
Removing Air Filter
3. Install the cabin air filter/filter retainer back
into the fresh air inlet. When installing the
filter retainer make sure the retainer is fully
engaged.
4. Install the two screws back into the
assembly to secure the filter retainer to the
fresh air inlet.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such
items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points
and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding
doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated
periodically with a lithium based grease, such
as Mopar Spray White Lube to ensure quiet,
easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant,
the parts concerned should be wiped clean to
remove dust and grit; after lubricating, excess
oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When
performing other underhood services, the hood
latch release mechanism, and safety catch
should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated
twice a year, preferably in the Autumn and
Spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality
lubricant, such as Mopar Lock Cylinder Lubri-
cant directly into the lock cylinder.
1 — Screw Locations
2 — Fresh Air Inlet
1 — Fresh Air Inlet
2 — A/C Air Filter
3 — A/C Air Filter Retainer
7
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 161
162 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and
the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft
cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will
remove accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long
periods may cause deterioration of the wiper
blades. Always use washer fluid when using the
wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry wind-
shield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or
ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber
out of contact with petroleum products such as
engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies
depending on geographical area and frequency
of use. Poor performance of blades may be
present with chattering, marks, water lines or
wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as
necessary.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly main-
tained engine exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the
exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be
detected inside the vehicle; or when the under-
side or rear of the vehicle is damaged; have an
authorized technician inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for
broken, damaged, deteriorated, or misposi-
tioned parts. Open seams or loose connections
could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the
passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle
is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace
as required.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They
contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is
colorless and odorless. Breathing it can
make you unconscious and can eventually
poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to
“Safety Tips” in “Safety” for further informa-
tion.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
park over materials that can burn. Such
materials might be grass or leaves coming
into contact with your exhaust system. Do
not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact
anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will
destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as
an emissions control device and may seri-
ously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
Damage to the catalytic converter can
result if your vehicle is not kept in proper
operating condition. In the event of engine
malfunction, particularly involving engine
misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced
promptly. Continued operation of your
vehicle with a severe malfunction could
cause the converter to overheat, resulting
in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
WARNING!
(Continued)
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 162
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 163
Under normal operating conditions, the cata-
lytic converter will not require maintenance.
However, it is important to keep the engine
properly tuned to ensure proper catalyst opera-
tion and prevent possible catalyst damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunc-
tioning engine operation, a scorching odor may
suggest severe and abnormal catalyst over-
heating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off
the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer's specifica-
tions, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
damage:
Do not interrupt the ignition when the trans-
mission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or
towing the vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any ignition
components disconnected or removed, such
as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged
periods during very rough idle or malfunc-
tioning operating conditions.
Cooling System
Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protec-
tion every 12 months (before the onset of
freezing weather, where applicable). If the
engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the system
should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106)
only by an authorized dealer. Check the front of
the A/C condenser for any accumulation of
bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically
down the face of the condenser.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to
the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
contains visible sediment, have an authorized
dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant (anti-
freeze) (conforming to MS.90032).
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section
for the proper maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam
coming from under the hood, do not open
the hood until the radiator has had time to
cool. Never open a cooling system pres-
sure cap when the radiator or coolant
bottle is hot.
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry
away from the radiator cooling fan when
the hood is raised. The fan starts automati-
cally and may start at any time, whether the
engine is running or not.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the
ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time the ignition is in the ON mode.
7
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 163
164 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information.
NOTE:
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other
than specified Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result
in engine damage and may decrease corro-
sion protection. Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) engine coolant is different and should
not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive
Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (anti-
freeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant
(antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant
(antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system
will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled
with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not
use additional rust inhibitors or antirust prod-
ucts, as they may not be compatible with the
radiator engine coolant and may plug the
radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use
with propylene glycol-based engine coolant
(antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recom-
mended.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added
to the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
Adding Coolant
The vehicle has been built with an improved
engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can
be used up to 10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent
reducing this extended maintenance period, it
is important that you use the same engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032)
throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for
using Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine
coolant (antifreeze) that meets the require-
ments of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology)
that meets the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS.90032.
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine
coolant that meets the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled
water. Use higher concentrations (not to
exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F
(−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact an
authorized dealer for assistance.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or
deionized water when mixing the water/
engine coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use
of lower quality water will reduce the amount
of corrosion protection in the engine cooling
system.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 164
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 165
NOTE:
It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the
proper level of protection against freezing
according to the temperatures occurring in
the area where the vehicle is operated.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added
to the system, please contact a local autho-
rized dealer.
Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is
not recommended and can result in cooling
system damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are
mixed in an emergency, have a authorized
dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss
of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure
that engine coolant (antifreeze) will return to
the radiator from the coolant recovery tank.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if
there is any accumulation of foreign material on
the sealing surfaces.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze)
is a regulated substance requiring proper
disposal. Check with your local authorities to
determine the disposal rules for your commu-
nity. To prevent ingestion by animals or chil-
dren, do not store ethylene glycol-based coolant
in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or
pet, seek emergency assistance immediately.
Clean up any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick
visual method for determining that the coolant
level is adequate. With engine off and cold, the
level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the
bottle should be between the “MIN” and “MAX”
marks.
Points To Remember
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine compart-
ment. This is normally a result of moisture from
rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on
the radiator and being vaporized when the ther-
mostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (anti-
freeze) to enter the radiator.
WARNING!
Do not open hot engine cooling system.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when
the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated
engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in
the cooling system. To prevent scalding or
injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the
one specified for your vehicle. Personal
injury or engine damage may result.
7
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 165
166 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
If an examination of your engine compartment
shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks,
the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will
soon dissipate.
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator
and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine
coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, the
contents of the coolant expansion bottle
must also be protected against freezing.
If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) addi-
tions are required, the cooling system should
be pressure tested for leaks.
Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concen-
tration at a minimum of 50% OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) and distilled
water for proper corrosion protection of your
engine which contains aluminum compo-
nents.
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle
overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your
vehicle is equipped with air conditioning,
keep the front of the condenser clean.
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or
Winter operation. If replacement is ever
necessary, install ONLY the correct type ther-
mostat. Other designs may result in unsatis-
factory engine coolant (antifreeze)
performance, poor gas mileage, and
increased emissions.
Brake System
In order to ensure brake system performance,
all brake system components should be
inspected periodically. Refer to the “Mainte-
nance Plan” in this section for the proper main-
tenance intervals.
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be
checked when performing under the hood
service or immediately if the brake system
warning lamp indicates system failure.
If necessary, add fluid to bring level within the
designated marks on the side of the reservoir of
the brake master cylinder. Be sure to clean the
top of the master cylinder area before removing
cap.
With disc brakes the fluid level can be expected
to fall as the brake linings wear. However, an
unexpected drop in fluid level may be caused by
a leak and a system check should be
conducted.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure
and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot
resting or riding on the brake pedal can result
in abnormally high brake temperatures,
excessive lining wear, and possible brake
damage. You would not have your full braking
capacity in an emergency.
WARNING!
Use only manufacturer's recommended
brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants”
in “Technical Specifications” for further infor-
mation. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system
and/or impair its performance. The proper
type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also
identified on the original factory installed
hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 166
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 167
Automatic Transmission (3.6L Gasoline
Engine Only)
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission
fluid to ensure optimum transmission perfor-
mance and life. Use only the manufacturer’s
specified transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids
And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”. It
is important to maintain the transmission fluid
at the correct level using the recommended
fluid. No chemical flushes should be used in any
transmission; only the approved lubricant
should be used.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends
against using any special additives in the trans-
mission. Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is
an engineered product and its performance
may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the
transmission. The only exception to this policy is
the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid
leaks in six-speed transmissions. Avoid using
transmission sealers as they may adversely
affect seals.
To avoid contamination from foreign matter
or moisture, use only new brake fluid or
fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container. Keep the master cylinder reser-
voir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in
a open container absorbs moisture from
the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This
may cause it to boil unexpectedly during
hard or prolonged braking, resulting in
sudden brake failure. This could result in a
collision.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can
result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire.
Brake fluid can also damage painted and
vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to
contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal
components could be damaged, causing
partial or complete brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
WARNING!
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer’s recommended fluid may
cause deterioration in transmission shift
quality and/or torque converter shudder, and
will require more frequent fluid and filter
changes. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in
“Technical Specifications” for fluid
specifications.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your
transmission as the chemicals can damage
your transmission components. Such damage
is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
7
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 167
168 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does
not require adjustment under normal operating
conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not
required, therefore the transmission filler tube
is capped and no dipstick is provided. Your
authorized dealer can check your transmission
fluid level using a special service dipstick. If you
notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunc-
tion, visit your authorized dealer immediately to
have the transmission fluid level checked. Oper-
ating the vehicle with an improper fluid level can
cause severe transmission damage.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section
for the proper maintenance intervals.
In addition, change the fluid and filter if the fluid
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if
the transmission is disassembled for any
reason.
RAISING THE VEHICLE
In the case where it is necessary to raise the
vehicle, go to an authorized dealer or service
station.
TIRES
Tire Safety Information
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the
following information: Tire Markings, Tire Identi-
fication Numbers, Tire Terminology and Defini-
tions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an
authorized dealer immediately. Severe
transmission damage may occur. An
authorized dealer has the proper tools to
adjust the fluid level accurately.
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 168
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 169
NOTE:
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on
US design standards. P-Metric tires have the
letter “P” molded into the sidewall preceding
the size designation. Example: P215/65R15
95H.
European — Metric tire sizing is based on
European design standards. Tires designed
to this standard have the tire size molded
into the sidewall beginning with the section
width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based
on US design standards. The size designation
for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric
tires except for the letters “LT” that are
molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are designed for
temporary emergency use only. Temporary
high pressure compact spare tires have the
letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
High flotation tire sizing is based on US
design standards and it begins with the tire
diameter molded into the sidewall. Example:
31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
7
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 169
170 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
R = Construction code
"R" means radial construction, or
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle
loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
LL = Light load tire or
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
EXAMPLE:
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 170
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 171
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN,
including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the
vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example:
031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
7
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 171
172 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a
minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure
for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire
placard.
Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity,
the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 172
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 173
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of
the driver's side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire,
including the spare tire (if equipped), at least
monthly and inflate to the recommended pres-
sure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information
about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the
vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front,
rear, and spare tires.
7
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 173
174 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not
exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on
your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load
carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading
conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pres-
sures specified on the Tire and Loading Infor-
mation placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the
“Starting And Operating” section of this manual.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front
and rear axles must not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWRs, vehicle
loading, and trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle
Loading” in the “Starting And Operating”
section of this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions
of your vehicle, locate the statement “The
combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the
Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage
and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should
never exceed the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For
example, if “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and
there will be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750
(5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg
and there will be five 68 kg passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-340
(5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. The following table shows examples
on how to calculate total load, cargo/
luggage, and towing capacities of your
vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table
is for illustration purposes only and may not
be accurate for the seating and load carry
capacity of your vehicle.
For the following example, the combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 174
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 175
7
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 175
176 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tires — General Information
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
Four primary areas are affected by improper tire
pressure:
Safety
Fuel Economy
Tread Wear
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Safety Both underinflation and overinflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling
of sluggish response or over responsiveness in
the steering.
NOTE:
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may
cause erratic and unpredictable steering
response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may
cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling
resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
ment.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfort-
able ride. Over-inflation produces a jarring and
uncomfortable ride.
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous.
Overloading can cause tire failure, affect
vehicle handling, and increase your stopping
distance. Use tires of the recommended load
capacity for your vehicle. Never overload
them.
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and
can cause collisions.
Underinflation increases tire flexing and
can result in overheating and tire failure.
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to
cushion shock. Objects on the road and
chuckholes can cause damage that result
in tire failure.
Overinflated or underinflated tires can
affect vehicle handling and can fail
suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle
control.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
problems. You could lose control of your
vehicle.
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle
to drift to the right or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 176
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 177
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear edge of the
driver's side door.
At least once a month:
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
make a visual judgement when determining
proper inflation. Tires may look properly
inflated even when they are under-inflated.
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
damage.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are
always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire
inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the
tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a
wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature
change. Keep this in mind when checking tire
pressure inside a garage, especially in the
Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C)
and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then
the cold tire inflation pressure should be
increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi
(13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT
reduce this normal pressure build up or your
tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe
speeds and within posted speed limits. Where
speed limits or conditions are such that the
vehicle can be driven at high speeds, main-
taining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced
vehicle loading may be required for high-speed
vehicle operation. Refer to an authorized tire
dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve
stem.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under
maximum load is dangerous. The added
strain on your tires could cause them to fail.
You could have a serious collision. Do not
drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum
capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph
(120 km/h).
7
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 177
178 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Radial Ply Tires
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be
repaired if it meets the following criteria:
The tire has not been driven on when flat.
The damage is only on the tread section of
your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an
inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs
and additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that
have experienced a loss of pressure should be
replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire
of identical size and service description (Load
Index and Speed Symbol). Replace the tire pres-
sure sensor as well as it is not designed to be
reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a
rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss
of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode.
A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation
pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has
limited driving capabilities and needs to be
replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not
repairable. When a run flat tire is changed after
driving with underinflated tire condition, please
replace the TPM sensor as it is not designed to
be reused when driven under run flat mode 14
psi (96 kPa) condition.
NOTE:
TPM Sensor must be replaced after driving the
vehicle on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded
at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in
the run flat mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for
more information.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice condi-
tions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than
30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In Case Of
Emergency” for further information.
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of
tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to
handle poorly. The instability could cause a
collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of
four. Never combine them with other types of
tires.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous.
Forces generated by excessive wheel
speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A
tire could explode and injure someone. Do
not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30
seconds continuously when you are stuck,
and do not let anyone near a spinning
wheel, no matter what the speed.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 178
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 179
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equip-
ment tires to help you in determining when your
tires should be replaced.
Tire Tread
These indicators are molded into the bottom of
the tread grooves. They will appear as bands
when the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an
inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced.
Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including, but not limited to:
Driving style.
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation
pressures can cause uneven wear patterns
to develop across the tire tread. These
abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
ment.
Distance driven.
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of
V or higher, and Summer tires typically have
a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires
per the vehicle scheduled maintenance is
highly recommended.
NOTE:
Wheel Valve Stem must be replaced as well
when installing new tires due to wear and tear
in existing tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible. Protect
tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance
of many characteristics. They should be
inspected regularly for wear and correct cold
tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer
strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and perfor-
mance when replacement is needed. Refer to
the paragraph on “Tread Wear Indicators” in
this section. Refer to the Tire and Loading Infor-
mation placard or the Vehicle Certification Label
for the size designation of your tire. The Load
Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be
found on the original equipment tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the
“Tire Safety Information” section of this manual
for more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced
after six years, regardless of the remaining
tread. Failure to follow this warning can result
in sudden tire failure. You could lose control
and have a collision resulting in serious injury
or death.
7
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 179
180 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
It is recommended to replace the two front tires
or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire
can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If
you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the
wheel’s specifications match those of the orig-
inal wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized
tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any
questions you may have on tire specifications or
capability. Failure to use equivalent replace-
ment tires may adversely affect the safety,
handling, and ride of your vehicle.
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons
(Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction
levels may vary between different all season
tires. All season tires can be identified by the
M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire
sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety
and handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and
dry conditions, and are not intended to be
driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is
equipped with Summer tires, be aware these
tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving
conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F
(5°C) or if roads are covered with ice or snow.
For more information, contact an authorized
dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on
the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets
of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or
speed rating other than that specified for
your vehicle. Some combinations of unap-
proved tires and wheels may change
suspension dimensions and performance
characteristics, resulting in changes to
steering, handling, and braking of your
vehicle. This can cause unpredictable
handling and stress to steering and
suspension components. You could lose
control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death. Use only the tire and
wheel sizes with load ratings approved for
your vehicle.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally
equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with
a smaller load index could result in tire
overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires
having adequate speed capability can
result in sudden tire failure and loss of
vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a
different size may result in false speedometer
and odometer readings.
WARNING!
(Continued)
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice
conditions. You could lose vehicle control,
resulting in severe injury or death. Driving too
fast for conditions also creates the possibility
of loss of vehicle control.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 180
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 181
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of
snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be
identified by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol
on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the orig-
inal equipment tires. Use snow tires
only in sets of four; failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings
than what was originally equipped with your
vehicle and should not be operated at
sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For
speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to orig-
inal equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on
ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry
surfaces may be poorer than that of
non-studded tires. Some states prohibit
studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire
Service Kit” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
Refer to the “Towing Requirements - Tires” in
“Starting And Operating” for restrictions when
towing with a spare tire designated for tempo-
rary emergency use.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire
and wheel equivalent in look and function to the
original equipment tire and wheel found on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire
may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle.
If your vehicle has this option, refer to an autho-
rized tire dealer for the recommended tire rota-
tion pattern.
NOTE:
This spare tire may not have a tire pressure
monitor sensor.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a compact spare by looking at
the spare tire description on the Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of
the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin
with the letter “T” or “S” preceding the size
designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic
car wash with a compact or limited use
temporary spare installed. Damage to the
vehicle may result.
7
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 181
182 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount
a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
compact spare tire. Do not install more than
one compact spare tire and wheel on the
vehicle at any given time.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emer-
gency use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a collapsible spare by looking at
the spare tire description on the Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of
the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description example:
165/80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is
properly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the
collapsible tire using the electric air pump
before lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount
a conventional tire on the collapsible spare
wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically
for the collapsible spare tire.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire may look like the originally
equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not
the same as your original equipment tire, replace
(or repair) the original equipment tire and rein-
stall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
NOTE:
This spare tire may not have a tire pressure
monitor sensor.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use
spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to
follow the warnings, which apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use
spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to
follow the warnings, which apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 182
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 183
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emer-
gency use only. This tire is identified by a label
located on the limited use spare wheel. This
label contains the driving limitations for this
spare. This tire may look like the original
equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited
use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it
is not the same as your original equipment tire,
replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportu-
nity.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum
and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned
regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water
to maintain their luster and to prevent corro-
sion. Wash wheels with the same soap solution
recommended for the body of the vehicle and
remember to always wash when the surfaces
are not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road
chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on
dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild
soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the
wheel’s protective coating that helps keep them
from corroding and tarnishing.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including
excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the
selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals
and equipment to prevent damage to the
wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recom-
mended or select a non-abrasive, non-acidic
cleaner for aluminum or chrome wheels.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare tire
affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not
drive more than the speed listed on the
limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the
cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of
the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do
so could result in loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that
use acidic solutions or strong alkaline
additives or harsh brushes. Many aftermarket
wheel cleaners and automatic car washes
may damage the wheel's protective finish.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap,
Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
7
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 183
184 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the wheels
with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply
the brakes to remove the water droplets from
the brake components. This activity will remove
the red rust on the brake rotors and prevent
vehicle vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or
Low Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
Tire Chains And Traction Devices
Use of traction devices require sufficient
tire-to-body clearance. Due to limited clearance
the following traction devices are recom-
mended. Follow these recommendations to
guard against damage.
Traction device must be of proper size for the
tire, as recommended by the traction device
manufacturer.
No other tire sizes are recommended for use
with a tire chain or traction device.
Install on front tires only.
For LT225/75R16 and 215/75R16C tires
use of a Quality Chain Corp Light Truck
Highway Service (Non-Cam) tire chain or
equivalent snow traction device is recom-
mended.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel's protective
finish. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash
soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these
specialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel
cleaners, abrasives, or polishing compounds.
They will permanently damage this finish and
such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY
USING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that
is required to maintain this finish.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S,
Snow) between front and rear axles can
cause unpredictable handling. You could lose
control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires,
observe the following precautions:
Because of restricted traction device clear-
ance between tires and other suspension
components, it is important that only trac-
tion devices in good condition are used.
Broken devices can cause serious damage.
Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage.
Remove the damaged parts of the device
before further use.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 184
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 185
Tire Rotation Recommendations
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle
operate at different loads and perform different
steering, driving, and braking functions. For
these reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation
of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially
worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such
as those on all season type tires. Rotation will
increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow
and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any
rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior
to rotation being performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward
cross” shown in the following diagram. This
rotation pattern does not apply to some direc-
tional tires that must not be reversed.
Tire Rotation (Forward Cross)
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were
established by the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration. The specific grade rating
assigned by the tire's manufacturer in each
category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to
Federal safety requirements in addition to
these grades.
Install device as tightly as possible and
then retighten after driving about ½ mile
(0.8 km). Autosock traction devices do not
require retightening.
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and
large bumps, especially with a loaded
vehicle.
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement.
Observe the traction device manufacturer’s
instructions on the method of installation,
operating speed, and conditions for use.
Always use the suggested operating speed
of the device manufacturer’s if it is less
than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Do not use traction devices on a compact
spare tire.
CAUTION!
(Continued)
7
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 185
186 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating,
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and one-half times
as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their
use, however, and may depart significantly from
the norm due to variations in driving habits,
service practices, and differences in road char-
acteristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent the
tire's ability to stop on wet pavement, as
measured under controlled conditions on spec-
ified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor trac-
tion performance.
Temperature Grades
The Temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat, when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to
a level of performance, which all passenger
vehicle tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades
B and A represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel, than the minimum
required by law.
STORING THE VEHICLE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than 21
days, we recommend that you take the following
steps to minimize the drain on your vehicle's
battery:
Disconnect the negative cable from the
battery.
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out
of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or
more, run the air conditioning system at idle
for about five minutes in the fresh air and
high blower setting prior to storing. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to mini-
mize the possibility of compressor damage
when the system is started again.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
under-inflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 186
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 187
(Continued)
BODYWORK
Protection From Atmospheric Agents
Vehicle body care requirements vary according
to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals
that make roads passable in snow and ice and
those that are sprayed on trees and road
surfaces during other seasons are highly corro-
sive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne
contaminants, road surfaces on which the
vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold
weather, and other extreme conditions will have
an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations
will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from
the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or
removal of paint and protective coatings from
your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation
Stone and gravel impact
Insects, tree sap and tar
Salt in the air near seacoast localities
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants
Body And Underbody Maintenance
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights
and fog lights that are lighter and less suscep-
tible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
therefore different lens cleaning procedures
must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the
lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping
with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with
a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
solvents, steel wool or other aggressive mate-
rial to clean the lenses.
Preserving The Bodywork
Washing
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash
your vehicle in the shade using Mopar Car
Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the
panels completely with clear water.
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar
Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to
remove.
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as
Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film,
stains and to protect your paint finish. Take
care never to scratch the paint.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power
buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin
out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning
materials such as steel wool or scouring
powder that will scratch metal and painted
surfaces.
7
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 187
188 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Special Care
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you
drive near the ocean, hose off the undercar-
riage at least once a month.
It is important that the drain holes in the
lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and
trunk be kept clear and open.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in
the paint, touch them up immediately. The
cost of such repairs is considered the respon-
sibility of the owner.
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision
or similar cause that destroys the paint and
protective coating, have your vehicle repaired
as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs
is considered the responsibility of the owner.
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals,
fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such
materials are well packaged and sealed.
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,
consider mud or stone shields behind each
wheel.
Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as
soon as possible. An authorized dealer has
touch up paint to match the color of your
vehicle.
INTERIORS
Seats And Fabric Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric uphol-
stery and carpeting.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the
following manner:
Remove as much of the stain as possible by
blotting with a clean, dry towel.
Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp
towel.
For tough stains, apply Mopar Total Clean, or
a mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth
and remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to
remove soap residue.
For grease stains, apply Mopar Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove
soap residue.
Do not use any harsh solvents or any other
form of protectants on Stain Repel products.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or
removal of paint and decals.
CAUTION!
(Continued)
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning
purposes. Many are potentially flammable,
and if used in closed areas they may cause
respiratory harm.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 188
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 189
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chem-
ical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will
weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also
weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solu-
tion or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts
from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft
cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn
or if the buckles do not work properly.
Plastic And Coated Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this
vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When
cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to
avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solu-
tion may be used, but do not use high
alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If soap
is used, wipe clean with a clean damp cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking
for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts
must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision
if they have been damaged (i.e., bent
retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect
repellents, suntan lotions, or hand sani-
tizers to the plastic, painted, or decorated
surfaces of the interior may cause perma-
nent damage. Wipe away immediately.
Damage caused by these type of products
may not be covered by your New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
7
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 189
190 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Leather Parts
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended
for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved
by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth.
Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive
and damage the leather upholstery and should
be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stub-
born soils can be removed easily with a soft
cloth and Mopar Total Clean. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery
with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils,
cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner
is not required to maintain the original condi-
tion.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye
transfer more so than darker colors. The leather
is designed for easy cleaning, and FCA recom-
mends Mopar total care leather cleaner applied
on a cloth to clean the leather seats as needed.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a
regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any
commercial household-type glass cleaner.
Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution
when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
with electric defrosters or windows equipped
with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments that may scratch the
elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray
cleaner on the towel or cloth that you are using.
Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
Cleaning The Instrument Panel Cupholders
Removal
Pull the flexible liner from the cupholder drawer
starting at one edge to ease removal.
Cleaning
The liner is top shelf dishwasher safe, or you
may follow the cleaning procedure below.
Soak the liner in a mixture of medium hot tap
water and one teaspoon of mild liquid dish
soap. Let soak for approximately 30 minutes.
After 30 minutes, pull the liner from the water
and dip it back into the water about six times.
This will loosen any remaining debris. Rinse the
liner thoroughly under warm running water.
Shake the excess water from the liner and dry
the outer surfaces with a clean soft cloth.
Installation
Place the liner into the cupholder drawer and
push the liner into place so that the retention
tabs seat into the corresponding openings in
the drawer.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or
Ketone based cleaning products to clean
leather upholstery, as damage to the
upholstery may result.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 190
191
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
IDENTIFICATION DATA
Vehicle Identification Number
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found
on the left front corner of the instrument panel,
visible through the windshield. This number
also appears on the vehicle frame and under-
body as well as the Automobile Information
Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your
vehicle, the vehicle registration and title.
Vehicle Identification Number
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
systems loses normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. However, there will be
some loss of overall braking effectiveness. You
may notice increased pedal travel during appli-
cation, greater pedal force required to slow or
stop, and potential activation of the “Brake
System Warning Light”.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason
(i.e., repeated brake applications with the
engine off), the brakes will still function.
However, the effort required to brake the
vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to
the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed
and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/
bolts should be torqued using a properly cali-
brated torque wrench using a high quality six
sided (hex) deep wall socket.
Torque Specifications
**Use only authorized dealer recommended
lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or
oil before tightening.
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
145 Ft-Lbs
(197 N·m)
M16 x 1.50 21 mm
8
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 191
192 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to
mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or
loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until
each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure
that the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/
bolt (do not insert it halfway).
Torque Patterns
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt
torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are
properly seated against the wheel.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
3.6L Engine
This engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide
optimum fuel economy and perfor-
mance when using high quality
unleaded “Regular” gasoline having a posted
octane number of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/
2 method. The use of higher octane “Premium”
gasoline is not required, as it will not provide
any benefit over “Regular” gasoline in these
engines.
While operating on gasoline with an octane
number of 87, hearing a light knocking sound
from the engine is not a cause for concern.
However, if the engine is heard making a heavy
knocking sound, see your dealer immediately.
Use of gasoline with an octane number lower
than 87 can cause engine failure and may void
or not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
experience these symptoms, try another brand
of gasoline before considering service for the
vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of
cleaner burning gasoline referred to as “Refor-
mulated Gasoline”. Reformulated gasoline
contains oxygenates and are specifically
blended to reduce vehicle emissions and
improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recom-
mended. Properly blended reformulated
gasoline will provide improved performance
and durability of engine and fuel system
components.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully
until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to
follow this warning may result in personal
injury.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 192
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 193
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the
proper octane rating, gasolines that contain
detergents, corrosion and stability additives are
recommended. Using gasolines that have these
additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle perfor-
mance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gaso-
line contains a higher level of deter-
gents to further aide in minimizing
engine and fuel system deposits.
When available, the usage of TOP TIER Deter-
gent gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER Deter-
gent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning
agents should be avoided. Many of these mate-
rials intended for gum and varnish removal may
contain active solvents or similar ingredients.
These can harm fuel system gasket and
diaphragm materials.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline
with oxygenates such as ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline
containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or
gasoline containing methanol are not the
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void
or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible
with gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol
(E-15). Use of gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with
E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of
these symptoms:
Operate in a lean mode.
OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
Poor engine performance.
Poor cold start and cold drivability.
Increased risk for fuel system component
corrosion.
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications
Modifications that allow the engine to run on
Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid
Propane (LP) may result in damage to the
engine, emissions, and fuel system compo-
nents. Problems that result from running CNG
or LP are not the responsibility of the manufac-
turer and may void or not be covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing
methanol, or gasoline containing more than
15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these blends may
result in starting and drivability problems,
damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable
standard, and/or cause the Malfunction
Indicator Light to illuminate. Please observe
pump labels as they should clearly
communicate if a fuel contains greater than
15% ethanol (E-15).
8
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 193
194 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
(Continued)
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl
(MMT) is a manganese-containing metallic addi-
tive that is blended into some gasoline to
increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT
provides no performance advantage beyond
gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces
spark plug life and reduces emissions system
performance in some vehicles. The manufac-
turer recommends that gasoline without MMT
be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of
gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline
pump; therefore, you should ask your gasoline
retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT.
MMT is prohibited in Federal and California
reformulated gasoline.
Fuel System Cautions
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions
control system can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your
vehicle’s performance:
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by
Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can
impair engine performance and damage
the emissions control system.
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or igni-
tion malfunctions can cause the catalytic
converter to overheat. If you notice a
pungent burning odor or some light smoke,
your engine may be out of tune or malfunc-
tioning and may require immediate service.
Contact an authorized dealer for service
assistance.
The use of fuel additives, which are now
being sold as octane enhancers, is not
recommended. Most of these products
contain high concentrations of methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
mance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsi-
bility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
(Continued)
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is
deadly. Follow the precautions below to
prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain
carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless
gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in
a closed area, such as a garage, and never
sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the
engine running for more than a short
period, adjust the ventilation system to
force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
Guard against carbon monoxide with
proper maintenance. Have the exhaust
system inspected every time the vehicle is
raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 194
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 195
FLUID CAPACITIES
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Engine
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate) 24 Gallons 90 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API
Certified)
6 Quarts
5.6 Liters
Cooling System *
3.6L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/
Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000
Mile Formula or equivalent)
10.5 Quarts 10 Liters
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE
grade.
Engine Oil Filter
We recommend you use Mopar Engine Oil Filters.
8
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 195
196 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
(Continued)
(Continued)
Spark Plugs
We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection
87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol.
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
CAUTION!
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other
than specified Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may
result in engine damage and may decrease
corrosion protection. Organic Additive Tech-
nology (OAT) engine coolant is different and
should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze) or any “globally compatible”
coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the
cooling system in an emergency, the
cooling system will need to be drained,
flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032), by an autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do
not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust
products, as they may not be compatible
with the radiator engine coolant and may
plug the radiator.
CAUTION!
(Continued)
This vehicle has not been designed for use
with propylene glycol-based engine coolant
(antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recom-
mended.
CAUTION!
(Continued)
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 196
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 197
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, Or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission
Use Only ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid. Failure to use ATF+4 fluid
may affect the function or performance of your transmission. We
recommend Mopar ATF+4 Fluid.
Brake Master Cylinder
We recommend you use Mopar DOT 4.
DOT 4 brake fluid must be changed every two years regardless of
mileage.
Power Steering Reservoir
Use Pentosin CHF 11S power steering fluid meeting FCA Material
Standard MS-11655.
8
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 197
198
MULTIMEDIA
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and
may be equipped with both wired and wireless
networks. These networks allow your vehicle to
send and receive information. This information
allows systems and features in your vehicle to
function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain secu-
rity features to reduce the risk of unauthorized
and unlawful access to vehicle systems and
wireless communications. Vehicle software
technology continues to evolve over time and
FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evalu-
ates and takes appropriate steps as needed.
Similar to a computer or other devices, your
vehicle may require software updates to
improve the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of unau-
thorized and unlawful access to your vehicle
systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to
your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the
most recent version of vehicle software (such as
Uconnect software) is installed.
NOTE:
FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you
directly regarding software updates.
To help further improve vehicle security and
minimize the potential risk of a security
breach, vehicle owners should:
Routinely check www.driveucon-
nect.com/support/soft-
ware-update.html (U.S. Residents) or
www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Resi-
dents) to learn about available Uconnect
software updates.
Only connect and use trusted media
devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communica-
tions cannot be assured. Third parties may
unlawfully intercept information and private
communications without your consent. For
further information, refer to “Onboard Diag-
nostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”.
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of
the possible outcomes if your vehicle’s
systems are breached. It may be possible
that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a
loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or
CD) into your vehicle if it came from a
trusted source. Media of unknown origin
could possibly contain malicious software,
and if installed in your vehicle, it may
increase the possibility for vehicle systems
to be breached.
As always, if you experience unusual
vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to your
nearest authorized dealer immediately.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 198
MULTIMEDIA 199
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of
buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the
faceplate located on the center of the instru-
ment panel that allows you to access and
change the customer programmable features.
Many features can vary by vehicle.
Uconnect 3/3 NAV With 5-inch Display Buttons On
The Touchscreen And Buttons On The Faceplate
NOTE:
The NAV button in the middle of your Uconnect
system may also contain the word TRIP.
Uconnect 3/3 NAV Settings
Push the Settings button on the faceplate to
display the menu setting screen. In this mode
the Uconnect system allows you to access
programmable features that may be equipped
such as Display, Units (if equipped), Voice,
Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance (if equipped),
Lights, Doors & Locks, Engine off Options,
Audio, Phone (if equipped), SiriusXM® Setup (if
equipped), Restore Settings, and Clear
Personal Data.
NOTE:
Only one category may be selected at a time.
The Back Arrow will change into a Done
button if any changes are made.
When making a selection, press the button on
the touchscreen to enter the desired mode.
Once in the desired mode, press and release
the preferred setting. Once the setting is
complete, either press the Back Arrow button
on the touchscreen or the Back button on the
faceplate to return to the previous menu or
press the X button on the touchscreen to return
to the Main Settings screen. Pressing the Up or
Down Arrow buttons on the right side of the
touchscreen will allow you to toggle up or down
through the available settings.
CAUTION!
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen,
doing so can result in damage to the
touchscreen.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
9
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 199
200 MULTIMEDIA
Display
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Mode Auto Manual
Display Brightness With Headlights
ON
Up Arrow Button Down Arrow Button
NOTE:
This feature is only available in Manual Display Mode.
Display Brightness With the
Headlights Off
Up Arrow Button Down Arrow Button
NOTE:
This feature is only available in Manual Display Mode.
Language List Of Selectable Language
NOTE:
When the “Language” feature is selected, you may select one of multiple languages (English/Français/Español) for all display nomenclature including
the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the Set Language button on the touchscreen, then press the desired language button
on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the language, showing that setting has been selected.
Touchscreen Beep On Off
Display Trip B On Off
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 200
MULTIMEDIA 201
Units — If Equipped
After pressing the Units button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Voice
After pressing the Voice button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Units US Metric Custom
NOTE:
The “Custom” option allows you to set the “Distance” (mi, or km), “Fuel Consumption” [MPG (US), MPG (UK), L/100 km, or km/L] (if equipped), and
“Temperature” (°C, or °F) units of measurement independently (if equipped).
Setting Name Selectable Options
Voice Response Length Brief Long
Show Command List Never w/ Help Always
NOTE:
This setting will display the possible options while in a voice session.
9
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 201
202 MULTIMEDIA
Clock & Date
After pressing the Clock & Date button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Safety/Assistance — If Equipped
After pressing the Safety/Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Set Time And Format — If
Equipped
12h 24h AM PM
Show Time Status — If
Equipped
On Off
Set Date Day Month Year
NOTE:
By selecting this setting, the day and month can be updated. The selectable days range from 1–31 (depending on month). The selectable months
consist of Jan/Feb/March/April/May/June/July/Aug/Sept/Oct/Nov/Dec.
Sync Time — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When this setting is selected, the time will set automatically based upon GPS location.
Setting Name Selectable Options
ParkView Backup Camera Delay On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image for up to 10 seconds after the
vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK,
or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
ParkView Backup Camera With
Rear Door — If Equipped
On Off
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 202
MULTIMEDIA 203
Lights — If Equipped
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Engine Off Options
After pressing the Engine Off Options button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Daytime Running Lights On Off
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned On or Off. This feature is only available if allowed by
law in the country of the vehicle purchase.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Door Locks Yes No
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).
Horn w/ Lock Off 1st Press 2nd Press
Setting Name Selectable Options
Radio Off Delay 0 sec 20 min
9
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 203
204 MULTIMEDIA
Audio
After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Equalizer + –
NOTE:
When in this display, you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the + and – setting buttons on the touchscreen
or by selecting any point on the scale between the + and – buttons on the touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up
or down to change the setting as well as press directly on the desired setting.
Balance — If Equipped Speaker Icon Arrow Buttons
NOTE:
When in this display, you may adjust the “Balance” (if equipped) of the audio by using the Arrow button on the touchscreen to adjust the sound level
of the right and left side speakers. Press the Speaker icon on the touchscreen to reset the balance to the factory setting.
Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1 2 3
NOTE:
The “Speed Adjusted Volume” feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed.
Surround Sound — If Equipped On Off
Loudness — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Loudness” feature improves sound quality at lower volumes when enabled.
Auto-On Radio — If Equipped On Off Recall Last
NOTE:
Press the Auto-On Radio button on the touchscreen to set how the radio behaves when the ignition is switched to ON/RUN.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 204
MULTIMEDIA 205
Phone/Bluetooth®
After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth® button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
AUX Volume Offset + –
NOTE:
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
Auto Play On Off
NOTE:
The Auto Play feature allows a media device to begin playing when the media device is plugged in. To make your selection, press the On or Off buttons
to activate or deactivate Auto Play.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Paired Phones/Devices List of Paired Phones/Devices
NOTE:
This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone system.
9
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 205
206 MULTIMEDIA
SiriusXM® Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the SiriusXM® Setup button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Tune Start On Off
NOTE:
The “Tune Start” feature begins playing the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel using one of the 12 presets, so you
can enjoy the complete song. This feature occurs the first time the preset is selected during that current song. Tune Start works in the background,
so you will not even realize it's on, except that you will miss the experience of joining your favorite song with only a few seconds left to play.
Channel Skip List of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM® can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while
scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Information Sirius ID
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free, limited-time subscription to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio with your radio. Following the expiration
of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the Subscription Information button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider
online.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 206
MULTIMEDIA 207
Restore Settings — If Equipped
After pressing the Restore Settings button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the Clear Personal Data button
on the touchscreen, the following settings will
be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Restore Settings to Default Yes No
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it will reset the Display, Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings. Once the settings are restored, a
pop-up appears stating “settings reset to default”. Press the okay button on the touchscreen to exit.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Clear Personal Data Yes No
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it will remove personal data including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
9
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 207
208 MULTIMEDIA
SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION
Safety Guidelines
Ensure that all persons read this manual care-
fully before using the system. It contains
instructions on how to use the system in a safe
and effective manner.
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen.
Doing so can result in damage to the touch-
screen.
Please read and follow these safety precau-
tions. Failure to do so may result in injury or
property damage.
Glance at the screen only when safe to do so.
If prolonged viewing of the screen is required,
park in a safe location and set the parking
brake.
Stop use immediately if a problem occurs.
Failure to do so may cause injury or damage
to the product. Return it to an authorized
dealer for repair.
Ensure the volume level of the system is set
to a level that still allows you to hear outside
traffic and emergency vehicles.
Safe Usage Of The Uconnect System
Read all instructions in this manual carefully
before using your system to ensure proper
usage.
The Uconnect system is a sophisticated elec-
tronic device. Do not let young children use
the system.
Permanent hearing loss may occur if you play
your music or the system at loud volumes.
Exercise caution when setting the volume on
the system.
Keep drinks, rain and other sources of mois-
ture away from the system. Besides damage
to the system, moisture can cause electric
shocks as with any electronic device.
NOTE:
Many features of this system are speed depen-
dent. For your own safety, it is not possible to
use some of the touchscreen features while the
vehicle is in motion.
Exposure To Radio Frequency Radiation
The internal wireless radio operates within
guidelines found in radio frequency safety stan-
dards and recommendations, which reflect the
consensus of the scientific community. The
radio manufacturer believes the internal wire-
less radio is safe for use by consumers. The
level of energy emitted is far less than the elec-
tromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices
such as mobile phones. However, the use of
wireless radios may be restricted in some situa-
tions or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you
are encouraged to ask for authorization before
turning on the wireless radio.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 208
MULTIMEDIA 209
Care And Maintenance
Touchscreen
Do not press the touchscreen with any hard
or sharp objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry,
etc.), which could scratch the touchscreen
surface!
Do not spray any liquid or caustic chemicals
directly on the screen! Use a clean and dry
microfiber lens cleaning cloth in order to
clean the touchscreen.
If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened
with a cleaning solution, such as isopropyl
alcohol or an isopropyl alcohol and water
solution ratio of 50:50. Be sure to follow the
solvent manufacturer's precautions and
directions.
UCONNECT 3/3 NAV WITH 5-INCH DISPLAY
Introduction To The Uconnect 3/3 NAV With
5-Inch Display System
There are a few quick ways for you to identify
your radio. For a more complete description,
please refer to the User Guide in your glove box
or visit DriveUconnect.com (US Residents) or
DriveUconnect.ca (Canadian Residents).
Uconnect 3/3 NAV features:
5-inch Touchscreen
Hands-free/Bluetooth®
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio — If Equipped
Navigation — If Equipped
Uconnect 3/3 NAV With 5-Inch Display
NOTE:
If equipped, your Uconnect radio may have a CD
player.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen,
doing so can result in breaking the
touchscreen.
9
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 209
210 MULTIMEDIA
1 — SETTINGS
Push the settings button to access the Ucon-
nect setting features.
2 — BACK
Push the BACK button to return to a previous
menu or screen.
3 — ENTER/BROWSE & TUNE/SCROLL
Push the ENTER/BROWSE button to accept a
highlighted selection on the screen. Rotate the
TUNE/SCROLL rotary knob to scroll through a
list or tune a radio station.
4 — MORE
Push the MORE button on the faceplate to
access additional options such as Trip and
Clock.
5 — PHONE
Push the PHONE button to access the Uconnect
Phone feature.
6 — NAV or TRIP
Push the NAV button on the faceplate to display
the current direction of the vehicle.
NOTE:
The NAV button in the middle of your Uconnect
system may also contain the word TRIP.
7 — MEDIA
Pushing the MEDIA button will allow you to
switch to Media mode (USB/iPod®, AUX, Blue-
tooth®).
8 — RADIO
Push the RADIO button on the faceplate to enter
Radio Mode. The different tuner modes, AM, FM
and SXM (if equipped), can be selected by
pushing the corresponding button on the touch-
screen while in the Radio Mode.
9 — ON/VOLUME
Rotate the rotary knob to adjust the Volume.
Push the ON/VOLUME button to turn on the
system. Push the ON/VOLUME button a second
time to turn off the system.
10 — MUTE
Push the MUTE button for activation/deactiva-
tion of the volume.
11 — SCREEN ON/OFF
Push the SCREEN ON/OFF button on the face-
plate to turn the touchscreen on or off.
More Button
Push the MORE button on the faceplate to
display the More Main Menu. The More Main
Menu contains the following options:
Trip Computer — If Equipped
Press the Trip button located on the touch-
screen to display the trip information of the
vehicle.
This function allows you to display the consump-
tion levels and define two separate trips called
Trip A and Trip B for monitoring the vehicle’s
complete journey in a similarly independent
manner.
Both functions can be reset (start of a new
journey): To reset the desired Trip, hold down
the Trip A or Trip B buttons.
Clock
Show the Clock in full screen mode.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 210
MULTIMEDIA 211
Radio Mode
Operating Radio Mode
Uconnect 3/3 NAV With 5-inch Display Radio
The radio is equipped with the following modes:
FM
AM (SW/LW/MW) – If Equipped
SiriusXM® Radio – If Equipped
Push the RADIO button on the faceplate, to
enter the Radio Mode. The different tuner
modes; FM/AM/SXM (if equipped), can then be
selected by pressing the corresponding buttons
on the touchscreen in the Radio mode.
Switching The System ON/OFF
The screen will switch on/off when the ON/
Volume button is pushed.
Volume/Power
Rotate the VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
Volume. When the audio system is turned on,
the sound will be set at the same volume level
as last played.
Push the POWER button to turn the system on
or off.
Enter/Browse And Tune/Scroll Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob
clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to
decrease the radio station frequency.
Seek Functions
Seek Up
Press and release the Seek Up button on the
touchscreen to tune the radio to the next listen-
able station or channel.
During a Seek Up function, if the radio reaches
the starting station after passing through the
entire band two times, the radio will stop at the
station where it began.
Fast Seek Up
Press and hold the Seek Up button on the
touchscreen to advance the radio through the
available stations or channels at a faster rate.
The radio stops at the next available station or
channel when the button on the touchscreen is
released.
Seek Down
Press and release the Seek Down button on
the touchscreen to tune the radio to the next
listenable station or channel.
During a Seek Down function, if the radio
reaches the starting station after passing
through the entire band two times, the radio will
stop at the station where it began.
1 — Radio Station Presets
2 — Show All Presets
3 — Seek Up
4 — Audio Settings
5 — Station Info
6 — Direct Tune
7 — Radio Band
8 — Seek Down
9
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 211
212 MULTIMEDIA
Fast Seek Down
Press and hold the Seek Down button on the
touchscreen to advance the radio through the
available stations or channel at a faster rate.
The radio stops at the next available station or
channel when the button on the touchscreen is
released.
Direct Tune
Direct Tune
The Direct Tune touchscreen is available in AM,
FM and SXM (if equipped) radio modes and can
be used to direct tune the radio to a desired
station or channel. Press the Tune button
located at the bottom of the radio screen.
Press the available number button to begin
selecting a desired station. Once a number has
been entered, any numbers that are no longer
possible (stations that cannot be reached) will
become deactivated/grayed out.
If you accidentally entered the wrong station
number, press the CLR button to clear the radio
station numbers and re-enter the correct
station number.
Once the last digit of a station has been
entered, the Direct Tune touchscreen will close
and the system will automatically tune to that
station. The selected Station or Channel
number is displayed in the Direct Tune text box.
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Mode — If Equipped
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct satel-
lite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to
provide clear, coast to coast radio content. Siri-
usXM® is a subscription based service.
Get over 160 channels on your satellite radio,
and enjoy all you want, all in one place. Hear
commercial-free music plus sports, news, talk
and entertainment. Get all the premium
programming, including Howard Stern, every
NFL® game, Oprah Radio, every MLB® and
NHL® game, every NASCAR® race, Martha
Stewart and more. And get 20+ extra channels,
including SiriusXM® Latino, offering 20 chan-
nels of commercial free music, news, talk,
comedy, sports and more dedicated to Spanish
language programming.
SiriusXM® services require subscriptions, sold
separately after the trial included with the new
vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your
service at the end of your trial subscription, the
plan you choose will automatically renew and
bill at then-current rates until you call Siri-
usXM® at 1-866-635-2349 to cancel. See Siri-
usXM® Customer Agreement for complete
terms at www.siriusxm.com (US Residents) or
www.siriusxm.ca (Canadian Residents). All fees
and programming subject to change. The satel-
lite service is available only to those at least 18
and older in the 48 contiguous US and D.C. The
SiriusXM® satellite service is also available in
PR (with coverage limitations). Our Internet
radio service is available throughout the satel-
lite service area and in AK and HI. © 2019 Siri-
usXM® Radio Inc. SiriusXM® and all related
marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM®
Radio Inc.
This functionality is only available for radios
equipped with a Satellite receiver. To receive
satellite radio, the vehicle needs to be outside
with a clear view to the sky.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 212
MULTIMEDIA 213
If the screen displays Acquiring Signal, you may
need to change the vehicle’s position to receive
a signal. In most cases, the satellite radio does
not receive a signal in underground parking
garages or tunnels.
Setting The Presets
Presets
The Presets are available for all Radio Modes,
and are activated by pressing any of the four
Preset buttons, located at the top of the screen.
When you are receiving a station that you wish
to commit into memory, press and hold the
desired numbered button for more that two
seconds or until you hear a confirmation beep.
The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the
Radio modes. Four presets are visible at the top
of the radio screen.
Pressing the All button on the radio home
screen will display all of the preset stations for
that mode.
Audio Settings
Audio Settings
1. Push the Settings button located on the
faceplate.
2. Then scroll down and press the Audio
button located on the touchscreen to open
the Audio menu.
3. The Audio Menu displays the following
options for you to customize your audio
settings.
Equalizer
Press the Equalizer button to adjust the Bass,
Mid and Treble. Use the + or – buttons to adjust
the equalizer to your desired settings. Press the
back arrow button when completed.
Balance/Fade
Press the Balance/Fade button to adjust the
sound from the speakers. Use the arrow button
to adjust the sound level from the front and rear
or right and left side speakers. Press the Center
C button to reset the balance and fade to the
factory setting. Press the back arrow button
when completed.
Speed Adjustable
Press the Speed Adjusted Volume button to
select between OFF, 1, 2 or 3. This will increase
the radio volume relative to a increase in
vehicle speed. Press the back arrow button
when completed.
Loudness — If Equipped
Press the Loudness button to select the Loud-
ness feature. When this feature is activated it
improves sound quality at lower volumes. Press
the back arrow button when completed.
9
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 213
214 MULTIMEDIA
Auto On Radio — If Equipped
Press the Auto On Radio button to set how the
radio behaves when the Ignition is switched to
ON. The options are: On, Off or Recall Last to the
last turned to stop condition. Press the back
arrow button when completed.
Radio Off Delay
Press the Radio Off Delay button to keep the
radio on for a preset amount of time after the
Ignition is switched OFF. Press the back arrow
button when completed.
AUX Volume Offset
Press the AUX Volume Offset button on the
touchscreen to activate the AUX Volume Offset
screen.
The AUX Volume Offset is adjusted by pressing
the + and - buttons. This alters the AUX input
audio volume. The level value, which spans
between plus or minus three, is displayed above
the adjustment bar.
Media Mode
Operating Media Mode
Media Mode is entered by pushing the MEDIA
button located on the faceplate.
Audio Source Selection
Once in MEDIA mode, press the Source button
and the desired mode button. USB, AUX and
Bluetooth® are the Media sources available.
You can select the Browse button to be given
these options:
Now Playing
Artists
Albums
Genres
Songs
Playlists
Folders
You can select the Source button, Pause/Play
button or the Info button for artist information
on current song playing.
Seek Up/Seek Down
Seek Up /Seek Down
Press and release the Right Arrow button on
the touchscreen for the next selection. Press
and release the Left Arrow button on the
touchscreen to return to the beginning of the
current selection, or return to the beginning of
the previous selection if the track is within the
first few seconds of the current selection.
Fast Seek Up
Press and hold the Right Arrow button on the
touchscreen and the desired mode will begin to
fast forward through the current track until the
button on the touchscreen is released.
Fast Seek Down
Press and hold the Left Arrow button on the
touchscreen and the desired mode will begin to
rewind through the current track until the
button on the touchscreen is released.
Track Selection (Browse)
Rotate the Browse button on the touchscreen to
scroll through and select a desired track on the
iPod®, MP3 player, phone, or USB. Press the
Exit button on the touchscreen if you wish to
cancel the browse function.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 214
MULTIMEDIA 215
Repeat
Press the Repeat button on the touchscreen to
repeat the song selection. To cancel repeat,
press the Repeat button on the touchscreen a
second time.
Shuffle
Press the Shuffle button on the touchscreen to
play the selections on the USB/iPod® or Blue-
tooth® device in random order to provide an
interesting change of pace. Press the Shuffle
button on the touchscreen a second time to
turn this feature off.
Audio
Refer to “Operating Radio Mode” in this section
for the adjustable audio settings.
Info
Press the Info button to display the current
track information. Press the X button to cancel
this feature.
USB Mode
USB Mode is entered by either inserting a USB
Jump Drive cable into the USB port, or by
pushing the MEDIA button located on the face-
plate. Once in “Media Mode”, press the Source
button on the touchscreen and select “USB”.
NOTE:
The system supports only FAT32 or ExFAT
formatted USB devices. The system does not
support devices with a capacity higher than
64GB. The system does not support USB hubs
connected to the USB port of the vehicle.
Connect your multimedia device directly to the
USB port, using the specific connection cable
for the device if necessary.
Inserting USB Device
Gently insert the USB/device into the USB Port.
If you insert a USB device with the ignition ON,
the unit will switch to USB mode and begin to
play when you insert the device. The display will
show the track number and index time in
minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start
of track 1.
Browse
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to
select Artist, Albums, Genres, Songs, Playlists or
Folders from the USB device. Once the desired
selection is made you can chose from the avail-
able media by pressing the button on the touch-
screen. Press the Exit button on the
touchscreen if you wish to cancel the browse
function.
Bluetooth® Mode
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio (BTSA) or Blue-
tooth® Mode is entered by pairing a Bluetooth®
device containing music to the Uconnect
system.
Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must
be paired with the Uconnect Phone to communi-
cate with the Uconnect system.
See the pairing procedure within this manual.
Once the Bluetooth® device is paired to the
Uconnect system, push the MEDIA button
located on the faceplate. Once in Media Mode,
press the Source button on the touchscreen
and select Bluetooth®.
NOTE:
For mobile phone compatibility and pairing
instructions, please visit UconnectPhone.com.
9
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 215
216 MULTIMEDIA
AUX Mode
AUX Mode is entered by inserting a AUX device
using a stereo cable with a 3.5 mm audio jack
into the AUX port, or by pushing the MEDIA
button located on the faceplate. Once in Media
Mode, press the Source button on the touch-
screen and select AUX.
Inserting Auxiliary Device
Gently insert the Auxiliary device cable into the
AUX Port. If you insert a Auxiliary device with the
ignition ON, the unit will switch to AUX mode and
begin to play when you insert the device cable.
Controlling The Auxiliary Device
The control of the Auxiliary device (e.g.,
selecting playlists, play, fast forward, etc.)
cannot be provided by the radio; use the device
controls instead. Adjust the volume with the
VOLUME rotary knob, or with the volume of the
attached device.
The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio
output from the Auxiliary device. Therefore if the
volume control on the Auxiliary device is set too
low, there will be insufficient audio signal for the
radio unit to play the music on the device.
Phone Mode
Operating Phone Mode
Uconnect 3/3 NAV With 5-inch Display Phone Menu
The Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated,
hands-free, in-vehicle communications system
with Voice Command Capability. Refer to “Ucon-
nect Voice Recognition” section for further infor-
mation.
The Uconnect Phone allows you to dial a phone
number with your mobile phone using simple
voice commands.
NOTE:
The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile phone
equipped with the Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Profile. To check mobile phone compatibility
please visit UconnectPhone.com.
For Uconnect customer support:
US residents — visit UconnectPhone.com or
call 1-877-855-8400
Canadian residents — call 1-800-465-2001
(English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French)
Phone Mode Activation
Press the PHONE button on the front panel to
activate the Phone mode.
1 — Call/Redial/Hold
2 — Mobile Phone Signal Strength
3 — Currently Paired Mobile Phone
4 — Mobile Phone Battery Life
5 — Mute Microphone
6 — Transfer To/From Uconnect System
7 — Uconnect Phone Settings Menu
8 — Text Messaging
9 — Direct Dial Pad
10 — Recent Call Log
11 — Browse Phone Book (Contains 911)
12 — End Call
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 216
MULTIMEDIA 217
Main Functions
The buttons on the display can be used to:
Compose phone numbers (using the graphic
keypad on the display)
Display and call the contacts in the mobile
phone phonebook
Display and call contacts from the “recent
calls” menu
Pair phones/audio devices to make access
and connection easier and quicker
Transfer calls from the system to the mobile
phone and vice versa
Deactivate the microphone audio for private
conversations
The mobile phone audio is transmitted through
the vehicle’s audio system. The system auto-
matically mutes the radio when the Phone func-
tion is used.
Connecting/Disconnecting A Mobile Phone Or
Bluetooth® Device
Pairing A Phone
Uconnect 3/3 NAV
1. Activate the Bluetooth® on your mobile
phone.
2. Push the PHONE button on the radio face-
plate.
3. If there are not any mobile phones paired
with the system, the display shows a dedi-
cated screen.
4. Press the Yes button to start the pairing
procedure search for the Uconnect device
on the mobile phone. If No is selected the
Phone main screen is displayed.
5. When prompted by the mobile phone, use
its keyboard to enter the PIN code shown on
the system display, or confirm on the mobile
phone the PIN displayed.
6. From the Phone screen you can always pair
a mobile phone by pushing the Settings
button, then press the Add Device button
and proceed as described above.
7. During the pairing stage, a screen is
displayed indicating the progress of the
operation.
8. If the pairing procedure is completed
successfully, a screen is displayed. Press
Yes to the question to pair the mobile phone
as favorite (the mobile phone will have
priority on all other mobile phones that will
be paired later on). If no other devices are
paired, the system will consider the first
associated device as favorite.
9
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 217
218 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
The priority is determined according to the
order of connection for mobile phones which
are not set as favorite. The last phone
connected will have the highest priority.
For more assistance on pairing your phone,
contact Uconnect customer support:
US residents — visit UconnectPhone.com
for phone compatibility, pairing instruc-
tions and details or call 1-877-855-8400
Canadian residents — visit Uconnect-
Phone.com for phone compatibility,
pairing instructions and details or call
1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French)
Storing Names/Numbers in The Mobile Phone
Before pairing your mobile phone, you must
make sure you have stored the names you want
to contact in the phonebook on your mobile
phone so that you can call them using the
vehicle's hands-free system.
If your phonebook does not contain any names,
enter new names for the most frequently used
numbers.
For further details, refer to your mobile phone
owner's handbook.
NOTE:
The names in the phonebook which do not
contain phone numbers or where both fields
(name and surname) are empty will not be
displayed.
Connection
The system connects automatically to the
paired mobile phone with the highest priority.
To choose a specific mobile phone or Blue-
tooth® audio device, proceed as follows:
Access the Settings menu
Select Phone/Bluetooth®
Select the Paired Phones or Paired Audio list
using the corresponding button on the
display
Select the specific device (mobile phone or
Bluetooth® device)
Press the Connect button
During the connection stage a screen is
displayed showing the progress of the opera-
tion
The device connected is highlighted in the list
Disconnection
To disconnect a specific mobile phone or Blue-
tooth® audio device, proceed as follows:
Access the Settings menu
Select Phone/Bluetooth®
Select the Paired Phones or Paired Audio list
using the corresponding button on the
display
Select the specific device (mobile phone or
Bluetooth® device)
Press the Disconnect button
Downloading A Phonebook From Your Mobile
Phone
If equipped and specifically supported by your
phone, Uconnect Phone asks you if you want to
download names (text names) and number
entries from your mobile phone’s phonebook.
Specific Bluetooth®-enabled phones with
Phone Book Access Profile may support this
feature. See UconnectPhone.com for supported
phones.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 218
MULTIMEDIA 219
NOTE:
If supported, the download and update begin
as soon as the Bluetooth® wireless phone
connection is made to the Uconnect Phone,
for example, after you start the vehicle.
You may be asked for permission to initiate
the phonebook download.
A maximum of 2,000 contact names with six
numbers per contact will be downloaded and
updated every time a phone is connected to
the Uconnect Phone.
Depending on the maximum number of
entries downloaded, there may be a short
delay before the latest downloaded names
can be used. Until then, if available, the previ-
ously downloaded phonebook is available for
use.
Only the phonebook of the currently
connected mobile phone is accessible.
Only the mobile phone’s phonebook is down-
loaded. SIM card phonebook is not part of
the mobile phonebook.
This downloaded phonebook cannot be
edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone.
These can only be edited on the mobile
phone. The changes are transferred and
updated to Uconnect Phone on the next
phone connection.
Making A Phone Call
Dialing The Phone Number Using The Keyboard
Icon On The Display
Enter the phone number using the graphic
keypad displayed.
Proceed as follows:
1. Press the Keyboard icon on the display and
use the number buttons to enter the
number.
2. Press the Call button to make a call.
Call By Saying A Phonebook Name Or Phone
Number
1. Push the VR button or Phone button
(if enabled) on the steering wheel.
2. After the BEEP, say “dial” (or “call” a full
name or phone number).
Recent Calls
The list of the last calls made for each of the
following call types can be displayed:
Calls received
Calls made
Calls without a reply
All calls
To access these types of calls, press the Recent
Calls button on the Phone menu main screen.
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress
When a phone conversation is active, a second
phone call can be made as follows:
Select the number/contact from the list of
recent calls.
Select the contact from the phonebook.
Press the Hold button and dial the number
using the graphic keyboard of the display.
Redial
To call the number/contact of last call made,
press the Redial button.
9
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 219
220 MULTIMEDIA
Answering An Incoming Call
Call Controls
The buttons on the display allow the following
phone call functions to be managed:
Answer
End
Ignore
Put on hold/resume
Deactivate/activate the microphone
Transfer the call
Switch from one call to the other
Conference/merge two active calls
Answering Or Ignoring A Call With No Call
Currently In Progress
When an incoming call rings or is announced on
Uconnect, push the Answer button on the touch-
screen or push the PHONE button on the
steering wheel.
Answering Or Ignoring An Incoming Call With A
Call Currently In Progress
When an incoming call rings or is announced on
Uconnect, push the Answer button on the touch-
screen or push the PHONE button on the
steering wheel to answer the call and put the
ongoing call on hold.
NOTE:
Not all mobile phones may support the manage-
ment of an incoming call when another phone
conversation is active.
Ending A Call
Press the End button on the touchscreen or the
PHONE button on the steering wheel controls to
end a call in progress.
Only the ongoing call is ended and any call on
hold becomes the new active call.
Depending on the type of mobile phone, if the
ongoing call is ended by the caller, the call on
hold may not be activated automatically.
Uconnect Phone Features
Mute/Unmute
1. During a call, push the Voice Recognition
(VR) button on the steering wheel.
2. After the BEEP, say “mute” (or “mute off”).
Reading Messages
The system can read the messages received by
the mobile phone.
To use this function the mobile phone must
support the SMS exchange function via Blue-
tooth®.
If this function is not supported by the phone,
the corresponding message button is deacti-
vated (grayed out) or may only accept incoming
messages.
When a text message is received, the display
will show a screen where the options "Listen",
"Call" or "Ignore" can be selected.
Press the message button to access the list of
SMS messages received by the mobile phone
(the list displays a maximum of 60 messages
received).
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 220
MULTIMEDIA 221
SMS Message Reader Activation/Deactivation
The SMS message automatic reading function
can be activated/deactivated by pressing the
corresponding button on the display, which is
shown after pressing the phone selection
button.
NOTE:
On some mobile phones, to make the SMS
voice reading function available, the SMS notifi-
cation option on the phone must be enabled,
this option is usually available on the phone, in
the Bluetooth® connections menu for a device
registered as Uconnect. After enabling this func-
tion on the mobile phone, it must be discon-
nected and reconnected with the system to
make it effective.
SMS Message Options
Preset SMS messages are stored in the system
and can be sent to answer a received message
or as a new message.
Navigation Mode — If Equipped
Operating Navigation Mode — If Equipped
Planning A Route
Using the search bar provides a wide range of
ways to find places and then navigate to them.
You can search your destination in different
ways:
A specific address
A partial address
A type of place
A zip code
A city to navigate to a city center
A Point of Interest (POI) near your current
location
Latitude and longitude coordinates
Using Search
Press the Search button in the Main menu
to start searching. The search screen will open,
displaying the keyboard and the following
buttons:
Search Function
1. Back Button: Press the Back button to
return to the previous screen.
2. Search Input Box: Enter your search term in
the search input box. As you type, matching
addresses and Points of Interests (POI) are
shown.
9
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 221
222 MULTIMEDIA
3. Type Of Search: Press this button to change
the type of search to any of the following:
Whole Map: Select this option to search
your current map with no limit to the
search radius. Your current location is
the center of the search. The results are
ranked by exact match.
Near Me: Select this option to search with
your current GPS location as the search
center. The results are ranked by
distance.
In Town or City: Select this option to use
a town or city as the center of your
se
arch. Enter the town or city name using
the keyboard on the touchscreen. When
you have selected the town or city from
the results list, you can search for an
address or POI in that city.
Along Route: When a route has been
planned, you can select this option to
search along your route for a specific type
of location, such as a POI category. When
prompted, enter the type of location and
then select
it in the right-hand column to
carry out the search.
Near Destination: When a route has been
planned, you can select this option to use
your destination as the center of your
search.
Latitude Longitude: Select this option to
enter a pair of latitude and longitude
coordinates.
NOTE:
By default, the current map is searched. Once
you have used search, the last search type you
selected is used.
4. View Button: Press this button to return to
the map view or guidance view.
5. Show/Hide Keyboard: Press this button to
show or hide the keyboard.
6. List/Map Button: Select this button to
switch between showing the results in a list
or showing the results on the map.
7. Keyboard Layout Button: Press this button
to change your keyboard layout to another
language.
8. 123?! Button: Press this button to use
numbers and symbols on your keyboard.
Select the =\< button to toggle between the
numbers and more symbols. Select the ABC
button to go back to the general keyboard.
Planning A Route — Searching For A City Center
When planning a route to a city center, you can
search for a town, city or postal code.
1. Use the keyboard to enter the name of the
city or town you want to plan a route to.
Using The Keyboard
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 222
MULTIMEDIA 223
2. Select the city from the results shown in the
Addresses list.
Search Selection
NOTE:
The city name is shown to the right of the search
input box, and the city center POI is shown
before in the Points of Interest list.
3. Select the city center POI.
Point Of Interest
NOTE:
The city center location is shown on the map.
4. Select Drive.
Begin Navigation
A route is planned and then guidance to
your destination begins. As soon as you
start driving, the guidance view is shown au-
tomatically.
Planning A Route — Searching For A POI
You can search for a POI type, such as a restau-
rant or tourist attraction. Alternatively, you can
search for a specific POI.
1. Use the keyboard to enter the name of the
POI that you want to plan a route to.
NOTE:
When searching, the whole map is selected. If
you want to change how the search is done,
select the button to the right of the search box.
You can then change where the search is done,
for example, to be along the route or in a city.
2. Select a POI category, such as “Restaurant”
or an individual POI. If you select a POI cate-
gory, only POIs from that category are
shown. You can then select an individual
POI. The location is shown on the map.
3. To see more information about the POI,
select the POI on the map and then select
the pop-up menu button. Select More Infor-
mation on the pop-up menu.
9
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 223
224 MULTIMEDIA
4. To plan a route to this destination, select
the drive button.
Begin Navigation
For more information on navigating to a POI,
refer to “Points Of Interest” within this section.
Planning A Route — Searching By Entering Coor-
dinates
1. Select the type of search button to the right
of the search box.
2. Select Latitude Longitude.
3. Type in your pair of coordinates. You can
enter any of these coordinate types:
Decimal values
Degrees, minutes and seconds
GPS standard coordinates
4. Select a suggestion for your destination.
5. To plan a route to this destination, select
the drive button.
Planning A Route Using The Map
1. Move the map and zoom in until you can
see the destination that you want to navi-
gate to.
2. When you have found your destination on
the map, select it by pressing and holding
the screen for about one second.
Planning A Route Using The Map
NOTE:
A pop-up menu shows the nearest address.
3. To plan a route to this destination, select
the drive button.
Planning A Route Using My Places
1. Select the Main Menu button to open the
Main Menu.
2. Select My Places.
3. Select the Place you want to navigate to, for
example Home.
My Places
4. To plan a route to this Place, select the drive
button.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 224
MULTIMEDIA 225
Finding A Parking Lot
1. Press the Parking button from the Main
Menu.
NOTE:
If a route is planned, the map shows parking
lots near your destination. If a route isn’t
planned, the map shows parking lots near your
current location. You also have an option to
view the parking lots in a list by pressing the
Menu button to the left of the red highlighted
icon.
2. Select a parking lot from the map or the list.
Find A Parking Lot
3. To plan a route to your chosen parking lot,
select the drive button.
Finding A Gas Station
1. Select the Main Menu button to open the
Main Menu.
2. Select Gas Station.
NOTE:
You also have an option to view the gas stations
in a list by pressing the Menu button to the left
of the red highlighted icon.
Finding A Gas Station
3. Select a gas station from the map or the list.
By opening the pop-up menu, you can add
the gas station as a stop on your route. You
can also plan a route to your chosen gas
station by pressing the drive button on the
touchscreen. Your system will plan a route,
and guidance to your destination will begin.
The guidance view will be shown automati-
cally once you start driving.
Changing Your Route
Making Changes To Your Route
After you plan a route, you may want to change
the route or even the destination. There are
various ways to change your route without the
need to completely re-plan the entire journey.
To change the current route, press the Current
Route button in the Main menu. The
following options are available:
9
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 225
226 MULTIMEDIA
Current Route Menu
Clear Route
Press the button to clear the currently
planned route. The Current Route Menu will
close and the screen will return to the map view.
Find Alternative
Press the button while driving on a planned
route to show up to three alternative routes on
the map view. Each alternative route shows the
difference in travel time in a balloon.
Select your chosen route by tapping on the time
balloon.
Press “Let’s GO.” Guidance to your destination
will automatically begin, and the guidance view
appears automatically as you begin driving.
Avoid Blocked Road
Press the button to avoid an unexpected
obstacle that is blocking the road on your route.
A new route will be found that avoids blocked
roads.
You may be shown a maximum of two alterna-
tives depending on the road network between
you and your destination.
The new route is shown on the map view with
the difference in travel time in a balloon.
Select the new route by pressing the time
balloon. Guidance to your destination will
resume avoiding blocked roads, and the guid-
ance view will appear automatically as you
begin driving.
NOTE:
It may not be possible to find an alternative
route around the blocked road if none exists.
Avoid Part Of Route
Press the button to avoid part of the current
route.
You are shown a list of the sections that make
up your current route.
Select the section of the route you want to
avoid. A pop-up menu will appear on the map
showing the location of the instruction.
To avoid the chosen section of the route, select
“Avoid.” A new route is planned that will avoid
your chosen route sections, and the new route
will appear in map view.
NOTE:
To avoid more sections of the route, repeat the
steps above. It may not be possible to find an
alternative route around the section if none
exists.
Avoid Toll Roads and More
Select the button to avoid some types of
route features that are on your currently
planned route. These include ferries, toll roads
and unpaved roads.
Show Instructions
Press the button to see a list of turn-by-turn
instructions for your planned route.
The instructions include the following informa-
tion:
Current location
Street names
Up to two road numbers shown in road signs
(if available)
An instruction arrow
An instruction description
The distance between two consecutive
instructions
Exit number
The full addresses of stops on your route
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 226
MULTIMEDIA 227
Add Stop To Route
Press the button to add a stop to your route.
You can add a stop by selecting a point on the
map. In map view, zoom in on the map and
press and hold to select a location. Then, select
the pop-up menu button, and press “Add to
Current Route.”
You route will be recalculated to include your
stop.
Change Route Type
Press the button to change the type of route
used to plan your route. Your route will be recal-
culated using the new route type selected.
You can select the following types of routes:
Fastest Route
Shortest Route
Most Eco-Friendly Route
Avoid Interstate Highways
You can set the default route type in the
settings menu.
Reorder Stops
Press the button to see the lists of stops for
your current route. You can change the order of
the stops on your route by pressing “Edit Stops”.
Use the Up and Down arrows to change the
order of your stops. Your route will be recalcu-
lated with the stops in that changed order.
NOTE:
You can also delete stops from your route by
pressing the Edit Stops button and then press
the Delete button. The stop will be removed
from your route and your route will be recalcu-
lated.
Play Route Or Track Preview
Press button to watch a preview of your
planned route or track.
NOTE:
This feature is not available while driving.
Stop Route Preview
Press button to stop the preview of your
planned route.
Voice Command — If Equipped
About Voice command
Instead of pressing the touchscreen to control
your navigation system, you can use your voice
to control navigation.
For example, to switch to 2D view, you can say
“2D view.”
To view a list of available commands, press the
“Help” button in the Main menu and then press
“What can I say?”
Using Voice Control
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
9
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 227
228 MULTIMEDIA
The following example shows how to use voice
control to plan a journey to your Home address:
1. Push the Voice Recognition button on the
steering wheel to turn on the microphone.
A screen will pop up with examples of
commands.
NOTE:
Press the Help button in the Main menu then
press “What can I say?” to see a full list of
commands.
2. When you hear a beep, say a command of
your choice. For example, you can say “Navi-
gate home”.
NOTE:
For accurate results, speak normally without
trying to articulate words in an unnatural way. If
there is excessive road noise, for example, you
may need to speak directly into the microphone.
3. If the command is correct, say “Yes”.
NOTE:
If the command is incorrect, say “No” and
repeat the command after you hear the prompt
and tone again. Your navigation system plans a
route from your current location to your destina-
tion. To stop your navigation system from
listening out for further commands, say
“Cancel”.
Guidance View
About Guidance View
The guidance view is used to guide you along
the route to your destination. As soon as you
start driving, your navigation system will imme-
diately start guiding you to your destination with
spoken instructions and visual instructions on
the touchscreen. You can also see your current
location and details along your route, including
3D buildings in some cities. The guidance view
is normally in 3D. To show a 2D map with the
map moving in your direction of travel, change
the 2D and 3D default settings. Refer to
“Settings” within this section for more informa-
tion.
NOTE:
When you have planned a route and the 3D
guidance view is shown, select the switch view
button to change to the map view and use the
interactive features.
Guidance View
1 — Switch View Button
Select the Switch View button to change
between the map view and the guidance view.
2 — Instruction Panel
Press this button to view the following informa-
tion:
The direction of your next turn
The distance to your next turn
Lane guidance at some intersections
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 228
MULTIMEDIA 229
3 — Route Bar
The Route Bar is shown when you have planned
a route. The Route Bar contains arrival informa-
tion, such as the estimated time of arrival, the
length of time to drive to the destination from
your current location, and information about the
next stop, if you have stops on your route. The
bottom of the Route Bar represents your current
location and shows the distance to the next
stop on your route.
4 — Current Location
This symbol shows your current location. Press
this symbol, or the speed panel, to mark your
current location.
5 — Speed Panel
Press this button to view the following informa-
tion (if available):
The speed limit at your location
The name of the street you are driving on
NOTE:
If you drive more than 3 mph (5 km/h) over the
speed limit, the Speed Panel turns red. If you
drive less than 3 mph (5 km/h) over the speed
limit, the Speed Panel turns orange.
6 — Main Menu Button
Press the Main Menu Button to show the Main
Menu.
7 — Zoom Buttons
Press the zoom in + button to zoom in and the
zoom out – button to zoom out.
Advanced Lane Guidance
About Lane Guidance
NOTE:
Lane guidance is not available for all intersec-
tions or in all countries.
Your navigation system helps you prepare for
highway exits and junctions by showing the
correct driving lane for your planned route.
As you approach an exit or junction, the lane you
need is shown on the screen and in the instruc-
tion panel.
Using Lane Guidance
There are two types of lane guidance:
Lane images
Instructions in the status bar
Lane Guidance
9
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 229
230 MULTIMEDIA
Map View
About Map View
The map view is shown when you have no
planned route. You can use map view the same
way as you might look at a traditional paper
map. You can move around the map using
gestures, and zoom using the zoom buttons.
The map shows your current location and many
other locations such as your My Places. For
more information, refer to “My Places” within
this section.
Map View
1. Back Button
Press this button to return to an overview of
your whole route. Or, if no route is planned,
pressing this button moves the map to put
your current location at the center.
2. Map Symbols
Symbols are used on the map to show your
destination and your saved places. Map
symbols include:
Your destination
Your home location
A stop on your route
A location saved in My Places
NOTE:
For more information on how to set your home
location or add locations to My Places, refer to
“My Places” within this section. For more infor-
mation on adding stops to your route, refer to
“Changing Your Route”,
3. Traffic Information — If Equipped
Select the traffic incident to display informa-
tion about the traffic delay.
4. Selected Location
Press and hold to select a location on the
map. Select the Pop-up Menu button to
show options for the location, or select the
drive button to plan a route to the location.
5. Current Location
This symbol shows your current location on
the map.
6. Your Route
If you have a planned route, it will appear on
the map. You can select the route to clear it,
change the route type, add a stop, or save
changes to your route. Refer to “Changing
Your Route” in this section for more infor-
mation.
7. Main Menu Button
Press this button to open the Main Menu.
8. Zoom Buttons
Select the zoom buttons to zoom in and out.
9. Switch View Button
Press the Switch View button to change be-
tween the map view and the guidance view.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 230
MULTIMEDIA 231
Voices
About Voices
Your navigation system uses sound for some or
all of the following:
Driving directions
Warnings that you set
By selecting “Settings” in the Main Menu, then
selecting “Voices,” you can change the settings
for how voice instructions are given. Instruction
settings include the following:
Read Early Instructions Out Loud: This setting
allows to you to hear early instructions. For
example, an early instruction could be, “After
two miles, take the exit right.”
Read Road Numbers Out Loud (if equipped):
Use this setting to control whether road
numbers are read out loud as part of naviga-
tion instructions.
Read Road Sign Information Out Loud (if
equipped): Use this setting to control whether
road sign information is read out loud as part
of navigation instructions.
Read Street Names Out Loud (if equipped):
Use this setting to control whether street
names are read out loud as part of navigation
instructions.
Read Foreign Street Names Out Loud (if
equipped): Use this setting to control wether
foreign street names are read out loud as
part of navigation instructions.
Changing The Volume Level
To change the volume of your navigation
system, use the volume button on the radio
when an instruction is being given.
Settings
About Settings
You can change the way your naviga-
tion system looks and behaves. Most
of the settings on your system can be accessed
by pressing the Settings button in the Main
Menu.
Appearance
To change how your navigation screen looks,
select “Appearance” in the settings menu. From
here, you can change these features:
Switch To Night Colors When Dark: Select
this setting to make your system automati-
cally switch to night colors when it gets dark.
Automatic Zoom: Select “Automatic Zoom” to
change how your system zooms in Guidance
view when you approach a turn or intersec-
tion. Zooming in can make the turn or inter-
section easier to drive. The following options
are available:
Zoom in to next turn
Based on road type
None
Arrival Information
In the settings menu, select “Arrival Informa-
tion” to change the following settings:
Show Remaining Distance: Select this setting
to show the remaining distance left to travel
in the arrival information panel during navi-
gation.
9
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 231
232 MULTIMEDIA
Show Remaining Time: Select this setting to
show the remaining time left to travel in the
arrival information panel during navigation.
Switch Between Distance And Time Automat-
ically: Select this setting to control the auto-
matic switching between remaining distance
and remaining time in the arrival information
panel.
Show On Route
In the settings menu, select “Show On Route” to
see any of the following options in the route bar:
Parking: Select this setting to see parking lots
on your route.
Gas Stations: Select this setting to see gas
stations on your route.
Stops: Select this setting to see stops on your
route.
Show Previews Of Highway Exits
Select this setting to control the full screen
preview when you approach highway exits.
Automatic Map View Switching
Automatic changing of views is on by default.
For example, when an alternative route is being
suggested, the map will automatically switch to
map view, and when you start driving your map
will automatically switch to guidance view. You
can turn this feature off by selecting “Automatic
Map View Switching” in the settings.
Automatic Zoom
Select this setting to control the full screen
preview when you approach highway exits.
Guidance View Style
Select this setting to choose between 3D and
2D versions of the guidance view. Both the 2D
and 3D guidance views move in your direction
of travel.
In 3D guidance view, you can choose to use the
3D car icon or an arrowhead as the current loca-
tion indicator. By default, the 3D guidance view
shows the 3D car icon.
Voices Setting
Select this setting to change how instructions
are read out loud. Refer to “Voices” in the
previous section for more information.
Route Planning
Select this setting to control how your system
plans routes. The following options are avail-
able:
Always Take the Fastest Route
You can choose whether you would like the
navigation system to always default to the
fastest route.
Ask Me So I Can Choose
You can choose whether you would like the
navigation system to allow you to pick the
route to the destination.
Don’t Ask me
You can choose whether you would like the
navigation system to select the route to the
destination.
Fastest Route
You can choose whether you would like the
navigation system to chose the fastest route
to the destination.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 232
MULTIMEDIA 233
Shortest Route
You can choose whether you would like the
navigation system to chose the shortest
route by distance to the destination.
Most Eco-Friendly Route
You can choose whether you would like the
navigation system to chose the route that will
consume the least amount of energy.
Avoid Interstate Highways
You can choose whether you would like the
navigation system to avoid all highways while
navigating to the destination.
Sounds And Warnings
Select this setting to change the following
sounds and warnings:
Warning Type: You can choose the type of
warnings you want to hear when you are
driving:
Warning Sounds: Hear only warning
sounds
None: No warning sounds are given
Safety Warnings: You can change settings for
whether you want to be warned, never
warned, or warned only if you are speeding.
The following options are available:
When speeding: This warning is given
when you exceed the speed limit by more
than 3 mph (5 km/h). When you are
speeding, the speed panel also turns red
in the guidance view.
Driver Safety: Select this setting to make
some features locked while the vehicle is
in motion.
NOTE:
This feature increases safety by minimizing
driver distraction. When driver safety is on, a
message tells you when the lock is enabled.
System
Select this setting to reset all other settings.
Selecting “Reset” will delete all saved places
and settings and restore the standard settings.
This includes the language, voice settings,
warning settings, and theme.
NOTE:
This is not a software update and will not affect
the version of the software application installed
on your Uconnect system.
Points Of Interest
About Points Of Interest
Points Of Interest (POI), are useful places on the
map.
Here are some examples:
Restaurants
Hotels
Museums
Parking lots
Gas stations
Emergency Services
9
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 233
234 MULTIMEDIA
Using POIs To Plan A Route
When you plan a route, you can use a POI for the
destination or as a stop along the route.
Using Search
1. Select “Search” on the Main Menu to begin
a search. The search screen will open,
displaying the keyboard. Enter the name of
your desired destination. Your search
results will be displayed in two lists.
Addresses and city matches are shown in
the list called “Addresses.” POIs, types of
POIs, and Places are shown in the list called
“Points of Interest.” You can also select a
POI category to only see POI search results
from that category.
2. Select the desired POI. The location will
appear on the map. From here, you can
save the POI to “My Places,” use this POI as
a starting point, begin navigation to this
destination, or view more details about this
POI. By pressing “More Information,” you
can view the phone number and full
address of the POI.
3. If a route is already planned, you can add
the location to your current route. To plan a
route to this destination, press the Drive
button on the touchscreen.
Select A Route With A POI
NOTE:
Your navigation system will calculate a route,
and guidance to your destination will begin.
Guidance view will begin as soon as you start
driving. Refer to “Planning A Route” for more
information on how to search for a POI. Refer to
“My Places” for more information on how to add
a POI to your saved list of My Places.
My Places
About My Places
My Places provides an easy way to
select a location without the need to
enter the address or search for the location. You
can use My Places to create a collection of
useful or favorite addresses.
The following items are always in My Places:
Home: Your home location can be your home
address or somewhere you often visit. This
feature provides an easy way to navigate
there.
Recent Destinations: Select this button to
select your destination from a list of locations
you have recently navigated to.
Using My Places
You can use My Places as a way of navigating to
a place without having to enter the address. To
navigate to a saved destination in My Places,
follow these steps:
1. Press the touchscreen to bring up the Main
menu and press “My Places”.
2. Select the desired destination. The location
will appear on the map with a pop-up menu.
3. Press the Drive button to begin navigation
to this destination.
NOTE:
Your navigation system immediately starts
guiding you to your destination with spoken
instructions and visual instructions on the
touchscreen.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 234
MULTIMEDIA 235
Adding A Location To My Places
Adding From My Places
1. In the Main menu, press “My Places”.
2. Press “Add”.
Adding To My Places
3. To select a location, do one of the following:
Zoom in on the map at the location you
want to select. Press and hold to select
the location, then press the add location
symbol.
Search for a location using the search
function. Select “Show on Map,” then
press the add location symbol.
Adding A Location From The Map
1. In Map View, move the map and zoom in
until you can see the destination that you
want to navigate to.
2. Press and hold the point on the map to
select that location.
3. Press the three vertical dots to the right of
the name to open the pop-up menu.
4. Press “Add to My Places”.
Adding A Location From The Map
5. The name of the location will appear in the
edit screen. You can edit the name of the
location for easy recognition.
6. Press “Done” to save your location in the My
Places list.
Adding A Location Using Search
1. In the Main Menu, press “Search”.
2. Enter the name or address of a location
using the touchscreen keyboard.
3. Select the desired location, and then press
“Show in map”.
4. The map view will show the location. Press
the pop-up menu button.
5. Press “Add to My Places”.
6. The name of the location will appear in the
edit screen. You can edit the name of the
location for easy recognition.
7. Press “Done” to save your location in the My
Places list.
9
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 235
236 MULTIMEDIA
Setting Your Home Location
1. In the Main Menu, press “My Places”.
2. Press “Home”.
3. To select a location for home, do one of the
following:
Zoom in on the map at the location you
want to select. Press and hold to select
the location, then press the home icon
next to the name of the location.
You can also search for a location using
the search function. Select “Set home
location.”
Deleting A Location From My Places
Deleting A Recent Destination From My Places
1. In the Main Menu, select “My Places”.
2. Press “Recent Destinations”.
3. Press “Edit List”.
4. Select the destination(s) you want to delete.
5. Press the “Delete” button.
Deleting A Location From My Places
1. In the Main Menu, select “My Places”.
2. Press “Edit List”.
3. Select the destination(s) you want to delete.
4. Press the “Delete” button.
Getting Help
About Getting Help
Press the Help button in the Main
menu or from the Settings menu to
see the following information:
About: Press this button to view information
about your Uconnect system. This informa-
tion includes:
Serial number
Application version
Installed maps
Legal information, such as Copyright and
Licenses for EULA and Open Source
Important Safety Notices And Warnings
Global Positioning System
The Global Positioning System (GPS) is a satel-
lite-based system that provides location and
timing information around the globe. GPS is
operated and controlled under the sole respon-
sibility of the Government of the United States
of America, which is responsible for its avail-
ability and accuracy. Any changes in GPS avail-
ability and accuracy, or in environmental
conditions, may impact the operation of this
navigation system. TomTom® does not accept
any liability for the availability and accuracy of
GPS.
Use With Care
Use of TomTom® navigation while driving still
means that you need to drive with due care and
attention.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 236
MULTIMEDIA 237
Safety Settings
We recommend using the safety settings to
make your driving as safe as possible. These
are some of the options included in the safety
settings:
Show safety reminders
Warn when driving faster than allowed
You can also drive more safely by using voice
commands to control navigation.
Refer to “Settings” earlier in this section to learn
more about how to control safety and warning
settings.
This Document
Great care was taken in preparing this docu-
ment. Constant product development may
mean that some information is not entirely up to
date. The information in this document is
subject to change without notice.
TomTom® shall not be liable for technical or
editorial errors or omissions contained herein,
nor for incidental or consequential damages
resulting from the performance or use of this
document. This document contains information
protected by copyright. No part of this docu-
ment may be photocopied or reproduced in any
form without prior written consent from
TomTom® N.V.
Copyright Notices
© 2019 TomTom®. All rights reserved.
TomTom® and the "two hands" logo are regis-
tered trademarks of TomTom® N.V. or one of its
subsidiaries. Please see www.tomtom.com/
en_us/legal/ for warranties and end user
license agreements applying to this product.
© 2019 TomTom®. All rights reserved. This
material is proprietary and the subject of copy-
right protection and/or database rights protec-
tion and/or other intellectual property rights
owned by TomTom® or its suppliers. The use of
this material is subject to the terms of a license
agreement. Any unauthorized copying or disclo-
sure of this material will lead to criminal and
civil liabilities.
Data Source © 2019 TomTom® All rights
reserved.
The software included in this product contains
copyrighted software that is licensed under the
GPL. A copy of that license can be viewed in the
License section. You can obtain the complete
corresponding source code from us for a period
of three years after our last shipment of this
product. For more information, visit https://
www.tomtom.com/en_gb/opensource or
contact your local TomTom® customer support
team via us.support.tomtom.com/app/
answers/list. Upon request, we will send you a
CD with the corresponding source code.
Linotype, Frutiger and Univers are trademarks
of Linotype GmbH registered in the U.S. Patent
and Trademark Office and may be registered in
certain other jurisdictions. MHei is a trademark
of The Monotype Corporation and may be regis-
tered in certain jurisdictions.
9
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 237
238 MULTIMEDIA
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located
on the surface of the steering wheel.
Remote Sound System Controls
Pushing the top of the left-hand switch will
increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of
the switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the Voice Recognition (VR) button
below the volume controls will begin your voice
command functions. Please refer to “Uconnect
Voice Recognition” section for further informa-
tion.
The function of the right-hand control is
different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the right-hand control
operation in each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the right-hand switch will
“Scan” up for the next listenable station, and
pushing the bottom of the right-hand switch will
“Scan” down for the next listenable station.
Pushing the Phone pick up button on top of the
of the Scan buttons will open a phone call.
Pushing the Phone hang up button below the
Scan buttons will close a phone call.
Player Operation
Pushing the switch up once will go to the next
track on the Player. Pushing the switch down
once will go to the beginning of the current track
or to the beginning of the previous track if it is
within one second after the current track begins
to play.
If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays
the second track; three times, it will play the
third, etc.
IPOD®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
The USB Port and Auxiliary Jack is located on
the instrument panel left of the radio (driver’s
lower right). This feature allows an iPod® or
external USB device to be plugged into the USB
port.
USB Port And AUX Jack
iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, iPod
nano®, 5G iPod® and iPhone® devices. Some
iPod® software versions may not fully support
the iPod® control features. Please visit
Apple’s® website for software updates.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 238
MULTIMEDIA 239
USB Charging Port
The USB connector port can be used for
charging purposes only. Use the connection
cable to connect an iPod® or external USB
device to the vehicle's USB charging port which
is located next to the 12V power outlet near the
cup holder on the passenger side.
Passenger Compartment USB Charging Port
NOTE:
If the device battery to be charged is completely
depleted, it may take awhile to charge.
RAM TELEMATICS - IF EQUIPPED
Ram Telematics is designed to help improve
safety, efficiency, and productivity. It gives you
complete visibility of your fleet options, whether
from behind a desk or on a mobile device while
you are on the go. You can log-in to view near
real-time and historical activity, including loca-
tion, vehicle heath, and driver performance.
Activating Ram Telematics In Your Vehicles
Before you get started you will need:
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) of
each vehicle you want to activate.
Your main user’s log-in and password; new
customers will be asked to register.
If you are a new customer, you will need
company credit card information or invoice
number as further proof of customer identifi-
cation. Don’t worry, you will not be charged.
Go to activate.verizonconnect.com/ram/
#login. If you are an existing Verizon Connect
customer, enter your company’s log-in
credentials. New customers will need to
register to create a new account.
Manually enter the VIN(s) or upload a CSV file
with your VINs. A vehicle name is optional
and can be added later. Follow online instruc-
tions to complete your vehicle entry.
Create a password and enter billing informa-
tion. An email will be sent to you to complete
the final step. After that, you will be ready to
log-in and access Verizon Connect Fleet!
You are good to go! You will receive an email
confirming your vehicles are now online.
For more information, or to learn more, visit
www.verizonconnect.com/ram/.
Ram Telematics General Information
Modification Statement
Magneti Marelli has not approved any changes
or modifications to this device by the user. Any
changes or modifications could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Magneti Marelli n'approuve aucune modifica-
tion apportée à l'appareil par l'utilisateur, quelle
qu'en soit la nature. Tout changement ou modi-
fication peuvent annuler le droit d'utilisation de
l'appareil par l'utilisateur.
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod® or
external device while driving. Failure to follow
this warning could result in a collision.
9
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 239
240 MULTIMEDIA
Interference Statement
This device complies with Part 15, 22, 24, and
27 of the FCC and Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:(1) This
device may not cause interference, and(2) This
device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion of the device.
RF Exposure
This equipment complies with FCC and IC radia-
tion exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment. The antenna should be installed
and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm
between the radiator and your body.
Cet appareil est conforme aux limites d'exposi-
tion aux rayonnements de la IC pour environne-
ment non contrôlé. L'antenne doit être installé
de façon à garder une distance minmale de 20
centimètres entre la source de rayonnements
et votre corps.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone
being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or
noisy performance from your radio. This condi-
tion may be lessened or eliminated by relo-
cating the mobile phone. This condition is not
harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily “clear” by the reposi-
tioning of the phone, it is recommended that the
radio volume be turned down or off during
mobile phone operation when not using Ucon-
nect (if equipped).
Regulatory And Safety Information
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wire-
less radio is far below the FCC and IC radio
frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the
wireless radio will be used in such a manner
that the radio is 8 inch (20 cm) or further from
the human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within
guidelines found in radio frequency safety stan-
dards and recommendations, which reflect the
consensus of the scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal
wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The
level of energy emitted is far less than the elec-
tromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices
such as mobile phones. However, the use of
wireless radios may be restricted in some situa-
tions or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you
are encouraged to ask for authorization before
turning on the wireless radio.
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 240
MULTIMEDIA 241
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Develop-
ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts
de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage,
et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-
ettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-
quier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
NOTE:
This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reason-
able protection against harmful interference
in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the instructions,
may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guar-
antee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful inter-
ference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encour-
aged to try to correct the interference by one
or more of the following measures:
a. Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.
b. Consult an authorized dealer or an expe-
rienced radio technician for help.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR)
with these helpful quick tips. It provides the key
Voice Commands and tips you need to know to
control your Uconnect system.
Get Started
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile
device and feature compatibility and to find
phone pairing instructions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and
passenger conversations are examples of
noise that may impact recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume
while facing straight ahead. The micro-
phone is positioned in the dome lamp and
aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you
must first push either the VR or Phone
button , wait until after the beep, then
say your Voice Command.
9
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 241
242 MULTIMEDIA
5. You can interrupt the help message or
system prompts by pushing the VR or the
Phone button and saying a Voice
Command from current category.
All you need to control your Uconnect system
with your voice are the buttons on your steering
wheel.
VR And Phone Buttons
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given
at any point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After
the beep, say:
“Cancel” to stop a current voice session
“Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice
Commands
“Repeat” to listen to the system prompts
again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your
voice recognition system’s status. Cues appear
on the touchscreen.
Uconnect 3/3 NAV VR
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM, or
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio stations you would
like to hear. (Subscription or included Siri-
usXM® Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After
the beep, say:
“Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
“Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
TIP:
At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or
want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR
button on the steering wheel and say, “Help”.
The system provides you with a list of
commands.
Uconnect 3/3 NAV Radio
1 — Push To MUTE
2 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call,
Send, Or Receive A Text
3 — Push To End Call Push
4 — To Begin Radio, Media, And Navigation
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 242
MULTIMEDIA 243
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB, Blue-
tooth®, and Auxiliary ports. Voice operation is
only available for connected USB and iPod®
devices.
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After
the beep, say one of the following commands
and follow the prompts to switch your media
source or choose an artist.
“Change source to Bluetooth®”
“Change source to iPod®”
“Change source to USB”
“Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album
Greatest Hits”; “Play song Moonlight
Sonata”; “Play genre Classical”
TIP:
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to
see all of the music on your iPod® or USB
device. Your Voice Command must match
exactly how the artist, album, song, and genre
information is displayed.
Uconnect 3/3 NAV Media
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls
is easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook
button is illuminated for the Uconnect system,
your system is ready. Check Uconnect-
Phone.com for mobile phone compatibility and
pairing instructions.
Push the VR button or Phone button (if
enabled). After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
“Call John Smith”
“Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system
prompts”
“Redial (call previous outgoing phone
number)”
“Call back (call previous incoming phone
number)”
9
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 243
244 MULTIMEDIA
TIP:
When providing a Voice Command, push the VR
button or Phone button (if enabled) and say
“Call”, then pronounce the name exactly as it
appears in your phone book. When a contact
has multiple phone numbers, you can say “Call
John Smith work”.
Uconnect 3/3 NAV Phone
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect will announce incoming text
messages. Push the VR button or Phone button
(if enabled) and say “Listen”. (Must have
compatible mobile phone paired to Uconnect
system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to
you, push the VR button or Phone button
(if enabled). After the beep, say “Reply”.
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the
beep, repeat one of the pre-defined
messages and follow the system prompts.
* Only use the numbering listed. Otherwise, the
system will not transpose the message.
TIP:
Your mobile phone must have the full imple-
mentation of the Message Access Profile (MAP)
to take advantage of this feature. For details
about MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com. Apple®
iPhone® iOS 6 or later supports reading
incoming text messages only.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY
RESPONSES
Yes. Stuck in
traffic.
See you later.
No. Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
Okay. Where are
you?
I will be <5,
10, 15, 20,
25, 30, 45,
60> minutes
late.*
Call me. Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you
later.
I need
directions.
See you in
<5, 10, 15,
20, 25, 30,
45, 60> of
minutes.*
I’m on my
way.
Can’t talk
right now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY
RESPONSES
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 244
MULTIMEDIA 245
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Develop-
ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts
de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage,
et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-
ettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-
quier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
Additional Information
© 2019 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar
and Uconnect are registered trademarks and
Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US
LLC. SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos
are trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
Uconnect System Support:
US residents visit DriveUconnect.com or call:
1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a
week)
Canadian residents visit DriveUconnect.ca or
call: 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French)
Mon. – Fri., 8:00 am – 8:00 pm, ET
Sat., 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET
Sun., Closed
9
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 245
246
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to
have the right papers with you. Take your
warranty folder. All work to be performed may
not be covered by the warranty. Discuss addi-
tional charges with the service manager. Keep a
maintenance log of your vehicle's service
history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or
the specific work you want done. If you've had
an accident or work done that is not on your
maintenance log, let the service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have
your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the
situation with the service advisor and list the
items in order of priority. At many authorized
dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a
minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is
advisable to make these arrangements when
you call for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealers
are vitally interested in your satisfaction. We
want you to be happy with our products and
services.
Warranty service must be done by an autho-
rized dealer. We strongly recommend that you
take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. They
know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer's authorized dealers
have the facilities, factory-trained technicians,
special tools, and the latest information to
ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a
timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an autho-
rized dealer service manager first. Most matters
can be resolved with this process.
If for some reason you are still not satisfied,
talk to the general manager or owner of the
authorized dealer. They want to know if you
need assistance.
If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve
the concern, you may contact the manufac-
turer's customer center.
Any communication to the manufacturer's
customer center should include the following
information:
Owner's name and address
Owner's telephone number (home, mobile,
and office)
Authorized dealer name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 246
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 247
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (866) 726-4636
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800)
387-9983 French
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (866) 726-4636
Fax: (787) 782-3345
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficul-
ties, the manufacturer has installed special
Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf (TDD)
equipment at its customer center. Any hearing
or speech impaired customer, who has access
to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY)
in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that
require assistance can use the special needs
relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY
teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice
callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a
Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for
a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost
of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer's
New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The
manufacturer stands behind only the manufac-
turer's service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer's service contract, you will
receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identifica-
tion Card in the mail within three weeks of the
vehicle delivery date. If you have any questions
about the service contract, call the manufac-
turer's Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at (800) 521-9922 (Canadian resi-
dents, call (800) 465-2001 English / (800)
387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any
service contract that is not the manufacturer's
service contract. It is not responsible for any
service contract other than the manufacturer's
service contract. If you purchased a service
contract that is not a manufacturer's service
contract, and you require service after the
manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires, please refer to the contract documents,
and contact the person listed in those docu-
ments.
10
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 247
248 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
We appreciate that you have made a major
investment when you purchased the vehicle. An
authorized dealer has also made a major invest-
ment in facilities, tools, and training to assure
that you are absolutely delighted with the
ownership experience. You will be pleased with
their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty
issues or related concerns.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable
to this vehicle and market.
MOPAR PARTS
Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories
are available from an authorized dealer. They
are recommended for your vehicle in order to
help keep the vehicle operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that
could cause a crash or cause injury or death,
you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
in addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, an authorized dealer, or
FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); or go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,
NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety
defect, you should contact the Customer
Service Department immediately. Canadian
customers who wish to report a safety defect to
the Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investi-
gations and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to
http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines
only), some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit,
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of
component wear contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 248
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 249
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use
either the website or the phone numbers listed
below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide
the information that students and professional
technicians need in diagnosing/trouble-
shooting, problem solving, maintaining,
servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components is written in
straightforward language with illustrations,
diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with
diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations.
These practical manuals make it easy for
students and technicians to find and fix prob-
lems on computer-controlled vehicle systems
and features. They show exactly how to find and
correct problems the first time, using
step-by-step troubleshooting and driveability
procedures, proven diagnostic tests, and a
complete list of all tools and equipment.
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared
with the assistance of service and engineering
specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA US
LLC vehicles. Included are starting, operating,
emergency, and maintenance procedures as
well as specifications, capabilities, and safety
tips.
Call toll free at:
1-800-890-4038 (US)
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
www.techauthority.com (US)
10
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 249
250
INDEX
A
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze)
...............164
Adding Washing Fluid
...............................157
Additives, Fuel
.......................................193
Air Bag
.................................................74
Air Bag Operation ............................... 75
Air Bag Warning Light .......................... 73
Enhanced Accident Response.............. 151
Event Data Recorder (EDR) ................. 151
If Deployment Occurs .......................... 80
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ............81
Maintenance .....................................81
Side Air Bags .....................................76
Transporting Pets ............................... 89
Air Bag Light
............................... 47, 73, 90
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter)
...159
Air Conditioner Maintenance
......................160
Air Conditioner Refrigerant
.........................160
Air Conditioner System
.............................160
Air Conditioning Filter
......................... 34, 160
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips
............... 33, 34
Air Filter
..............................................159
Air Pressure
Tires
..............................................177
Alarm
Security Alarm ............................. 13, 49
Alarm System
Security Alarm....................................13
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle
...............................................8
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)
................164, 195
Disposal .........................................165
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
.......................56
Anti-Lock Warning Light
..............................52
Assist, Hill Start
........................................60
Auto Down Power Windows
..........................35
Auto Up Power Windows
..............................35
Automatic Door Locks
................................15
Automatic Transmission
......................95, 168
Adding Fluid ....................................168
Fluid And Filter Change ......................168
Fluid Change ...................................168
Fluid Level Check......................167, 168
Fluid Type ...............................167, 197
Special Additives ..............................167
AUX Cord
.............................................238
Auxiliary Driving Systems
.............................61
B
Battery
.........................................47, 157
Charging System Light .........................47
Keyless Key Fob Replacement ...............10
Belts, Seat
.............................................90
Body Builders Guide
................................... 8
Body Mechanism Lubrication
..................... 161
B-Pillar Location
.................................... 173
Brake Assist System
................................. 57
Brake Control System, Electronic
................... 57
Brake Fluid
...................................166, 197
Brake System
................................166, 191
Anti-Lock (ABS).................................. 56
Fluid Check .................................... 166
Master Cylinder ............................... 166
Parking............................................ 94
Warning Light.................................... 48
Brake, Parking
........................................ 94
Brake/Transmission Interlock
...................... 96
Bulb Replacement
.................................. 123
Bulbs, Light
....................................91, 123
C
Camera, Rear
....................................... 109
Capacities, Fluid
.................................... 195
Caps, Filler
Fuel
.............................................. 111
Oil (Engine)..................................... 156
Power Steering ................................ 103
Radiator (Coolant Pressure)................ 165
Car Washes
......................................... 187
Carbon Monoxide Warning
...................89, 194
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 250
251
Cargo Area Cover
.....................................37
Cargo Compartment
..................................37
Cargo Light
............................................26
Certification Label
..................................112
Change Oil Indicator
..................................44
Changing A Flat Tire
........................ 133, 168
Chart, Tire Sizing
....................................169
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light)
.........................55
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety
...................89
Checks, Safety
........................................89
Child Restraint
........................................83
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ....................................86
Child Seat Installation.......................... 88
Infant And Child Restraints ................... 85
Older Children And Child Restraints ........85
Clean Air Gasoline
..................................192
Cleaning
Wheels
...........................................183
Climate Control
........................................28
Manual ............................................28
Rear ................................................ 32
Cold Weather Operation
..............................92
Compact Spare Tire
.................................181
Contract, Service
....................................247
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap)
.............165
Cooling System
......................................163
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) .................164
Coolant Level...........................163, 165
Cooling Capacity ...............................195
Disposal Of Used Coolant ...................165
Drain, Flush, And Refill .......................163
Inspection.......................................165
Points To Remember .........................165
Pressure Cap ...................................165
Radiator Cap ...................................165
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ..164, 195
Corrosion Protection
................................187
Cruise Light
............................................53
Cupholders
.....................................38, 190
Customer Assistance
...............................246
Customer Programmable Features
................199
Cybersecurity
........................................198
D
Dealer Service
.......................................158
Defroster, Windshield
.................................90
Diagnostic System, Onboard
.........................54
Dimmer Control Switch
...............................27
Dimmer Switch
Headlight
..........................................24
Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission
.....................168
Power Steering.................................103
Disable Vehicle Towing
.............................149
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................ 165
Door Ajar
.............................................. 47
Door Ajar Light
........................................ 47
Door Locks
............................................ 14
Automatic ........................................ 15
Doors
.................................................. 14
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt
............................... 15
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water
............................... 121
E
Electric Brake Control System
....................... 57
Electric Remote Mirrors
.............................. 22
Electrical Power Outlets
............................. 39
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control)
....... 103
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
................... 57
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light
.......... 48
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck ............... 149
Jacking ...................................133, 168
Jump Starting.................................. 145
Emission Control System Maintenance
............ 55
11
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 251
252
Engine
................................................156
Air Cleaner ...................................... 159
Block Heater ..................................... 93
Break-In Recommendations .................. 93
Compartment ..................................156
Compartment Identification ................156
Coolant (Antifreeze)................... 163, 195
Cooling...........................................163
Exhaust Gas Caution ................... 89, 194
Fails To Start .....................................92
Flooded, Starting ................................ 92
Fuel Requirements ................... 192, 195
Jump Starting .................................. 145
Oil......................................... 158, 195
Oil Filler Cap....................................156
Oil Filter .........................................159
Oil Selection ............................ 158, 195
Oil Synthetic .................................... 159
Overheating ....................................147
Starting ............................................92
Engine Oil Viscosity
.................................159
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart
..........................159
Enhanced Accident Response Feature
...........151
Entry System, Illuminated
............................27
Ethanol
...............................................193
Exhaust Gas Cautions
........................ 89, 194
Exhaust System
............................... 89, 162
Exterior Lights
................................... 23, 91
F
Filters
Air Cleaner
......................................159
Air Conditioning ..........................34, 160
Engine Oil ............................... 159, 195
Engine Oil Disposal ...........................159
Flashers
Hazard Warning
................................123
Turn Signals ................................53, 91
Flat Tire Changing
...........................168, 181
Flat Tire Stowage
............................168, 181
Flooded Engine Starting
..............................92
Fluid Capacities
.....................................195
Fluid Leaks
.............................................91
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission
.....................168
Brake.............................................166
Cooling System ................................163
Power Steering.................................103
Fluids And Lubricants
...............................195
Fog Lights
..............................................25
Fold-Flat Seats
........................................15
Four-Way Hazard Flasher
...........................123
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle
............................149
Fuel
.................................................. 192
Additives........................................ 193
Clean Air ........................................ 192
Ethanol.......................................... 193
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .......................... 111
Gasoline ........................................ 192
Materials Added .............................. 193
Methanol ....................................... 193
Octane Rating ..........................192, 195
Requirements ..........................192, 195
Tank Capacity ................................. 195
Fuses
................................................ 128
G
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap)
.......................... 111
Gasoline, Clean Air
................................. 192
Gasoline, Reformulated
........................... 192
Gear Ranges
.......................................... 97
Gear Selector Override
............................. 148
Glass Cleaning
...................................... 190
Gross Axle Weight Rating
...................112, 113
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
...............112, 113
Guide
Body Builders
...................................... 8
GVWR
................................................ 112
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 252
253
H
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising,
Or Shallow Standing Water
.................121
Hazard Warning Flashers
..........................123
Head Restraints
.......................................20
Headlights
Cleaning
.........................................187
High Beam ........................................24
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch.......24
Passing ............................................24
Switch.............................................. 23
Heated Mirrors
........................................23
Heated Seats
..........................................18
Heater, Engine Block
.................................93
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch
...24
Hill Start Assist
........................................60
Hitches
Trailer Towing .................................. 114
Hood Prop
.............................................36
Hood Release
.........................................36
I
Ignition
.................................................11
Key..............................................9, 11
Switch..............................................11
Ignition Key Removal
.................................11
Illuminated Entry
......................................27
Immobilizer (Sentry Key)
.............................12
Inside Rearview Mirror
................................21
Instrument Cluster
..............................41, 53
Display .............................................43
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning
...................189
Interior And Instrument Lights
.......................25
Interior Appearance Care
...........................188
Interior Lights
..........................................25
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers)
..................28
Introduction
..............................................7
iPod/USB/MP3 Control
.............................238
J
Jack Location
........................................133
Jack Operation
..............................133, 168
Jacking And Tire Changing
.........................133
Jacking And Tire Changing Instructions
...........135
Jump Starting
........................................145
K
Key Fob
Programming Additional Key Fobs
.......... 10
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry)
.. 10
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry)
.... 10
Key-In Reminder
...................................... 12
Keys
..................................................... 9
Replacement .................................... 12
Sentry (Immobilizer)............................ 12
L
Lane Change Assist
.................................. 25
Lap/Shoulder Belts
.................................. 67
Latches
................................................ 91
Hood............................................... 36
Lead Free Gasoline
................................ 192
Leaks, Fluid
........................................... 91
Life Of Tires
......................................... 179
Light Bulbs
.....................................91, 123
Lights
.................................................. 91
Air Bag .................................47, 73, 90
Brake Assist Warning .......................... 59
Brake Warning .................................. 48
Bulb Replacement............................ 123
Cruise ............................................. 53
Daytime Running ............................... 24
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ...............23, 24
11
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 253
254
Electronic Stability Program(ESP)
Indicator
................................. 48, 59
Exterior ...................................... 23, 91
Hazard Warning Flasher ..................... 123
Headlights ........................................23
High Beam ........................................24
Illuminated Entry ................................27
Interior............................................. 25
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ......51
Park .......................................... 24, 53
Passing ............................................24
Security Alarm ...................................49
Service...........................................123
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ............61
Traction Control..................................59
Turn Signals .......................... 23, 53, 91
Warning Instrument
Cluster Descriptions
................... 48, 53
Loading Vehicle
............................. 112, 113
Capacities.......................................113
Tires ..............................................173
Locks
Automatic Door
............................ 14, 15
Low Tire Pressure System
............................61
Lubrication, Body
...................................161
Lug Nuts/Bolts
......................................191
M
Maintenance Free Battery
..........................157
Maintenance Schedule
.............................152
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine)
..51, 55
Manual
Service
...........................................249
Methanol
.............................................193
Mirrors
.................................................21
Electric Remote..................................22
Exterior Folding ..................................22
Heated .............................................23
Outside ............................................21
Rearview ..........................................21
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle
...............................................8
Monitor, Tire Pressure System
.......................61
Mopar Parts
..........................................248
MP3 Control
.........................................238
Multi-Function Control Lever
.........................23
N
New Vehicle Break-In Period
.........................93
O
Occupant Restraints
................................. 64
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel)
.................... 192
Oil Change Indicator
................................. 44
Reset .............................................. 44
Oil Filter, Change
................................... 159
Oil Filter, Selection
................................. 159
Oil Pressure Light
..................................... 49
Oil, Engine
....................................158, 195
Capacity ........................................ 195
Change Interval ............................... 158
Dipstick ......................................... 157
Disposal ........................................ 159
Filter ......................................159, 195
Filter Disposal ................................. 159
Identification Logo............................ 159
Materials Added To .......................... 159
Pressure Warning Light ....................... 49
Recommendation .....................158, 195
Synthetic........................................ 159
Viscosity .................................159, 195
Onboard Diagnostic System
......................... 54
Operating Precautions
............................... 54
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual
............................8, 249
Outside Rearview Mirrors
............................ 21
Overheating, Engine
................................ 147
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 254
255
P
Paint Care
...........................................187
Parking Brake
.........................................94
ParkSense System, Rear
...........................105
Passing Light
..........................................24
Pets
....................................................89
Placard, Tire And Loading Information
............173
Power
Mirrors.............................................22
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet)............39
Steering ................................. 102, 103
Windows ..........................................35
Power Steering Fluid
................................197
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
....................71
Preparation For Jacking
.................... 133, 135
R
Radial Ply Tires
......................................178
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap)
.............165
Radio Frequency
General Information .......................... 240
Rear Camera
........................................109
Rear ParkSense System
............................105
Rearview Mirror
.......................................21
Recreational Towing
................................120
Reformulated Gasoline
.............................192
Refrigerant
...........................................160
Release, Hood
.........................................36
Reminder, Seat Belt
..................................66
Remote Keyless Entry
Programming Additional Key Fobs
...........10
Replacement Bulbs
.................................123
Replacement Keys
....................................12
Replacement Tires
..................................179
Reporting Safety Defects
...........................248
Restraints, Child
.......................................83
Restraints, Head
......................................20
Rotation, Tires
.......................................185
S
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle
........................90
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle
......................91
Safety Defects, Reporting
..........................248
Safety Information, Tire
.............................168
Safety Tips
.............................................89
Safety, Exhaust Gas
...................................89
Schedule, Maintenance
............................152
Seat Belts
........................................66, 90
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ......................70
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage .....70
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage .................................... 70
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ......... 72
Child Restraints ................................. 83
Energy Management Feature ................ 71
Front Seat .............................66, 67, 68
Inspection ........................................ 90
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ................ 68
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ............... 69
Lap/Shoulder Belts ............................ 67
Operating Instructions......................... 68
Pregnant Women ............................... 71
Rear Seat......................................... 67
Reminder ......................................... 66
Untwisting Procedure .......................... 69
Seat Belts Maintenance
........................... 189
Seats
.................................................. 15
Adjustment....................................... 15
Heated ............................................ 18
Rear Folding ..................................... 15
Tilting.............................................. 15
Security Alarm
...................................13, 49
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze)
................. 195
11
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 255
256
Sentry Key (Immobilizer)
.............................12
Service Assistance
..................................246
Service Contract
....................................247
Service Manuals
....................................249
Settings
Personal
.........................................199
Shift Lever Override
.................................148
Shoulder Belts
.........................................67
Signals, Turn
.................................... 53, 91
Snow Chains (Tire Chains)
.........................184
Snow Tires
...........................................181
Spare Tires
.......................... 181, 182, 183
Spark Plugs
..........................................195
Speed Control (Cruise Control)
....................103
Starting
................................................92
Automatic Transmission .......................92
Button .............................................11
Cold Weather.....................................92
Engine Fails To Start............................92
Steering
................................................21
Column Lock ..................................... 21
Power .................................... 102, 103
Steering Wheel Audio Controls
....................238
Storage, Vehicle
............................... 33, 186
Storing Your Vehicle
................................186
Supplemental Restraint System – Air Bag
.........74
Sway Control, Trailer
..................................61
Synthetic Engine Oil
................................159
T
Telescoping Steering Column
........................21
Tire And Loading Information Placard
.............173
Tire Markings
........................................168
Tire Safety Information
.............................168
Tire Service Kit
...... 139, 140, 142, 143, 144
Tires
............................ 91, 176, 181, 185
Aging (Life Of Tires) ...........................179
Air Pressure.....................................176
Chains ...........................................184
Changing ................................133, 168
Compact Spare ................................181
General Information ..................176, 181
High Speed .....................................177
Inflation Pressure .............................177
Jacking...................................133, 168
Life Of Tires .....................................179
Load Capacity ..........................173, 174
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)..50, 61
Quality Grading ................................185
Radial ............................................178
Replacement ...................................179
Rotation .........................................185
Safety ....................................168, 176
Sizes............................................. 169
Snow Tires ..................................... 181
Spare Tires ......................181, 182, 183
Spinning ........................................ 178
Trailer Towing.................................. 117
Tread Wear Indicators ....................... 179
Wheel Nut Torque ............................ 191
To Open Hood
......................................... 36
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight
.................... 115
Torque Converter Clutch
........................... 102
Towing
........................................113, 149
Disabled Vehicle .............................. 149
Guide ............................................ 115
Recreational ................................... 120
Weight........................................... 115
Towing Behind A Motorhome
...................... 120
Traction
.............................................. 121
Traction Control
...................................... 60
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
........................... 61
Trailer Towing
....................................... 113
Cooling System Tips.......................... 119
Hitches.......................................... 114
Minimum Requirements .................... 116
Tips .............................................. 118
Trailer And Tongue Weight.................. 115
Wiring ........................................... 118
Trailer Towing Guide
............................... 115
Trailer Weight
....................................... 115
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 256
257
Transmission
Automatic
................................. 95, 167
Fluid.............................................. 197
Maintenance ...................................167
Transporting Pets
.....................................89
Tread Wear Indicators
..............................179
Turn Signals
...........................................53
U
Uconnect
Uconnect Settings
...............................10
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features
.......199
Uconnect Voice Command
.........................241
Uniform Tire Quality Grades
........................185
Unleaded Gasoline
..................................192
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt
.....................69
USB
...................................................238
V
Vehicle Certification Label
.........................112
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
...............191
Vehicle Loading
..................... 112, 113, 174
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations
.....................8
Vehicle Storage
................................33, 186
Viscosity, Engine Oil
.................................159
Voice Command
.....................................241
W
Warning Lights
(Instrument Cluster Descriptions)
...................51
Warnings And Cautions
.................................8
Warranty Information
...............................248
Washer
Adding Fluid ....................................157
Washing Vehicle
.....................................187
Water
Driving Through ................................121
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care
........................183
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim
........................183
Wind Buffeting
........................................ 36
Window Fogging
...................................... 33
Windows
............................................... 35
Power.............................................. 35
Windshield Defroster
................................. 90
Windshield Washers
..........................27, 157
Fluid ............................................... 27
Windshield Wiper Blades
.......................... 162
Windshield Wipers
................................... 27
Wipers Blade Replacement
....................... 162
Wipers, Intermittent
.................................. 28
11
20_VF_OM_EN_US_t.book Page 257
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and
personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off the
road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle
is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you
find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit
the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Ram brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference for common
questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information on accessories to help personalize your vehicle, visit
www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owners-manual.html (U.S.), www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Ram brand dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously
impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with
a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use public transportation.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower
and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
RAMTRUCKS.COM (U.S.) RAMTRUCK.CA (CANADA)
©2019 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
Ram est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF
THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
UCONNECT AND WARRANTY BOOKLET
OWNERS.MOPAR.CA
CANADA
MOPAR.COM
U.S.
20_VF_OM_EN_USC
FIRST EDITION
Whether it is providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s
heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we
know you will find the app an important extension of your Ram vehicle.
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App
Store
®
or Google Play
®
Store and enter the search keyword “ram toolbox” (U.S. residents only).
